You are on page 1of 224

WEB LCT

ALFOplus80HD
ALFOplus80HD in Full Outdoor configuration
management software application

Release 1.2

User manual

MN.00313.E - 002
The information contained in this handbook is subject to change without notice.
Property of SIAE MICROELETTRONICA. All rights reserved according to the law and according to the inter-
national regulations. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, without written permission from SIAE MICROELETTRONICA.
Unless otherwise specified, reference to a Company, name, data and address produced on the screen dis-
played is purely indicative aiming at illustrating the use of the product.
MS-DOS®, MS Windows® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation
HP®, HP OpenView NNM and HP–UX are Hewlett Packard Company registered trademarks.
UNIX is a UNIX System Laboratories registered trademark.
Oracle® is a Oracle Corporation registered trademark.
Mozilla Firefox is a Mozilla Foundation registered trademark.
Linux term is a trademark registered by Linus Torvalds, the original author of the Linux operating system.
Linux is freely distributed according the GNU General Public License (GPL).
Other products cited here in are constructor registered trademarks.
WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD
Contents

MANUAL CONTENT ................................................................................................................. 10

WEB LCT APPLICATION.......................................................................................................... 11

FUNCTIONALITIES .............................................................................................................. 12

LIMITS.............................................................................................................................. 13

CHARACTERS SET .............................................................................................................. 14

INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................... 15

WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE..................................................................... 16


OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE ......................................................................................... 17
Open the WEB LCT page from Browser ............................................................................ 17
Open more WEB LCT pages............................................................................................ 17
Close the WEB LCT page................................................................................................ 18

ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE ........................................................................................ 19


Equipment Menu area ................................................................................................... 20
Equipment info area...................................................................................................... 21
Users area ................................................................................................................... 22
User Profile parameter............................................................................................. 22
[Logout] parameter ................................................................................................ 22
[Open Far End] parameter ....................................................................................... 22
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link) ............................................ 23
[Help] parameter.................................................................................................... 23
Remote elements list area ............................................................................................. 24
Add a station to the list ........................................................................................... 25
Rename a station of the list ..................................................................................... 25
Remove a station of the list...................................................................................... 25
Add equipment to the list......................................................................................... 26
Remove equipment from the list ............................................................................... 26
Reset the remote equipment list ............................................................................... 27
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link) .................................... 27
Remote equipment list (info) .................................................................................... 28
Contextual area............................................................................................................ 29
Equipment status area .................................................................................................. 30

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 1


Verify the active manual operations .......................................................................... 31
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ............................................................... 31

MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE ....................................................................... 32

MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU) ......................................................................... 33

MAIN ................................................................................................................................ 34
Equipment Properties .................................................................................................... 35
Verify the basic configuration of the equipment........................................................... 35
Modify the equipment identifier ................................................................................ 35
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment .......................................... 35
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 35
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC .......... 36
Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................... 36
Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................... 36
Verify the equipment units ....................................................................................... 37
Equipment Properties contextual area........................................................................ 38
General Info tab ............................................................................................... 38
Equipment Features tab ..................................................................................... 39
Equipment Units tab.......................................................................................... 39
Performance Monitoring................................................................................................. 41
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure.......... 41
Activate one or more PM measures ........................................................................... 42
Deactivate one or more PM measures ........................................................................ 42
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures............................... 42
Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures............... 42
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure...................... 43
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) .................................... 44
Performance Monitoring contextual area .................................................................... 46
Performances window........................................................................................ 46
PM measures available ............................................................................................ 51
G828 > Radio 1A .............................................................................................. 51
RxPwr > Radio 1A ............................................................................................. 51
TxPwr > Radio 1A ............................................................................................. 51
ACM > Radio 1A ............................................................................................... 52
PM measures (info) ................................................................................................. 53
Report & Logger ........................................................................................................... 55
Save the log of the equipment alarms ....................................................................... 55
Delete the log of the equipment alarms ..................................................................... 56
Save the log of the operations executed by the users .................................................. 56
Delete the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................ 56
Save the equipment configuration ............................................................................. 57
Report & Logger contextual area............................................................................... 58
NMS Wake Up Config. ................................................................................................... 59
Verify the Wake Up functionality status...................................................................... 59
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality ............................ 59
Disable the Wake Up functionality ............................................................................. 59
NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area ....................................................................... 61
Wake Up functionality (info) ..................................................................................... 62
Software Info & Maint. .................................................................................................. 63
Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment ................................................ 63

2 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Update the software/firmware of the equipment ......................................................... 63
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller........................ 64
Restore Factory Default of the equipment .................................................................. 64
Execute the equipment software reset ....................................................................... 65
Software Info & Maint contextual area ....................................................................... 66
Equipment Firmware tab .................................................................................... 66
Advanced tab ................................................................................................... 67
Equipment software/firmware (info) .......................................................................... 68
Factory Default of the equipment (info) ..................................................................... 69
Backup/Restore Config. ................................................................................................. 70
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration) ................................... 70
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)................ 70
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last op-
eration of configuration restore (revert configuration) .................................................. 71
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area..................................................................... 72
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info) .................................................. 73
Alarm Severity Config. .................................................................................................. 74
Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms ............................. 74
Enable/disable an alarm .......................................................................................... 74
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .................................................. 74
Change the severity of an alarm ............................................................................... 75
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area ...................................................................... 76
Alarms management (info) ...................................................................................... 77
Group/User Management ............................................................................................... 78
Groups .................................................................................................................. 79
Verify the user groups ....................................................................................... 79
Add a user group .............................................................................................. 79
Modify a user group .......................................................................................... 80
Delete a user group........................................................................................... 81
Groups contextual area...................................................................................... 82
FTP protocol (info) ............................................................................................ 83
Users .................................................................................................................... 84
Verify the user list............................................................................................. 84
Add a user ....................................................................................................... 84
Modify a user ................................................................................................... 85
Delete a user ................................................................................................... 85
Users contextual area........................................................................................ 86
Users management (info) .................................................................................. 87
Permanent Login .................................................................................................... 89
Verify the IP address of Permanent Login ............................................................. 89
Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login ...................................................... 89
Permanent Login contextual area ........................................................................ 90
Logged Users ......................................................................................................... 91
Verify the users connected to the equipment ........................................................ 91
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................. 91
Logged Users contextual area ............................................................................. 92

EQUIPMENT ....................................................................................................................... 93
BW & Mod./Link ID ....................................................................................................... 94
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters
of the adaptive modulation ...................................................................................... 94
Modify the reference band........................................................................................ 94
Modify the reference modulation ............................................................................... 94
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation................................................ 95

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 3


Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled) ...... 95
Verify/modify the link identification number ............................................................... 95
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area ........................................................................... 96
Modulation & Capacity tab.................................................................................. 96
Local Link ID tab............................................................................................... 97
Adaptive modulation (info)....................................................................................... 98
General Preset ............................................................................................................. 99
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception ........................................... 99
Verify/modify the radio branch label .......................................................................... 99
General Preset contextual area ................................................................................100

BASE BAND ......................................................................................................................101


Ethernet.....................................................................................................................102
Bridge Mode Conf. .................................................................................................103
Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch .....................................................103
Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch ....................................................103
Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area .....................................................................104
Port Manager ........................................................................................................105
Verify the Ethernet ports configuration................................................................105
Modify the enabling status of a port....................................................................105
Activate the loop on line side of a port ................................................................105
Deactivate the loop on line side of a port ............................................................106
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port...................................106
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port .................................................106
Modify the transmission speed of a port ..............................................................107
Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port....................................107
Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports .........................107
Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port ................................................................107
Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports .................................108
Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports .....................................108
Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depend-
ing on its priority (User Priority).........................................................................108
Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management ...........................................109
Port Manager contextual area ............................................................................110
Physical Interface tab .................................................................................110
Optical tab ................................................................................................112
Data Flow tab ............................................................................................113
Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab..................................................................113
Tunneling tab ............................................................................................114
VLAN ...................................................................................................................116
Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management ........................................116
Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table ...............................116
Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table .............................117
Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch ............117
Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port ..........................................117
Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port ..........117
Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) ..........................................118
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority
802.1p received on the port ..............................................................................118
Verify the existing static VLANs..........................................................................118
Create one or more static VLANs........................................................................118
Modify the configuration of a static VLAN ............................................................119
Delete one or more static VLANs ........................................................................120
VLAN contextual area .......................................................................................121

4 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Basic Settings tab ......................................................................................121
Port Settings tab ........................................................................................122
Static VLANs tab ........................................................................................123
Prov. Bridge-VLAN .................................................................................................124
Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) ........................................124
Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) ......................124
Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area .....................................................................125
C-VID Registration tab ................................................................................125
PEP Configuration tab .................................................................................126
Prov. Bridge-EtherType...........................................................................................128
Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports ........................128
Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports .......................128
Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area ..............................................................129
LLF ......................................................................................................................130
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports ..............................130
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality ......................................130
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality...................131
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN ........131
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN ....131
Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN ......................................................131
Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio ........................................132
Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality .............................................132
Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio ...........................132
LLF contextual area ..........................................................................................133
Bidirectional LLF (info)......................................................................................135
Queue Depth.........................................................................................................136
Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ..............136
Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output .............136
Queue Depth contextual area ............................................................................137
Statistics ..............................................................................................................138
Interface ........................................................................................................139
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) ......................139
Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group) ................................................139
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group).....139
Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ..............................139
Interface contextual area ............................................................................141
Interface tab .......................................................................................141
Ethernet tab ........................................................................................141
DCN...........................................................................................................................145
MNGT Port Configuration ........................................................................................146
Verify the configuration of the management port..................................................146
Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port .......................................146
Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway ...................................................146
Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision ...........................................147
Modify the enabling status of management port ...................................................147
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port.............147
Modify the transmission speed of the management port ........................................148
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port ...........................148
Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port ..........................148
MNGT Port Configuration contextual area ............................................................150
Routing Table........................................................................................................152
Verify the Routing Table of the equipment ...........................................................152
Add an element to the Routing Table ..................................................................152

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 5


Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table .........................................152
Routing Table contextual area ...........................................................................154

SYNCHRONISATION...........................................................................................................155
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .................................................155
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ......................................................................155
Set the Hold Off Time parameter ...................................................................................156
Set the WTR Time parameter ........................................................................................156
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm.........................................................................156
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism ...............157
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation ...........................................................157
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources..........................................157
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source...............................................................157
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source ...............................................................158
Force the use of a synchronism source ...........................................................................158
Set a synchronism source as preferential ........................................................................158
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source................................159
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting for the
expiry of Wait Time......................................................................................................159
Verify/modify the management of SSM messages ............................................................160
Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s..................................................160
Synchronisation contextual area ....................................................................................161
General tab...........................................................................................................161
T0 tab ..................................................................................................................162
LAN SSM tab .........................................................................................................164
1000Base-T Role tab ..............................................................................................165
Synchronisation (info) ..................................................................................................166
Management of synchronisation...............................................................................166
Synchronism sources .............................................................................................166
Enabling of the synchronism sources ..................................................................166
Priority of the synchronism source......................................................................166
Quality of synchronism source ...........................................................................167
Forcing of a synchronism source ........................................................................168
Function of preferential synchronism source ........................................................168
Internal synchronism T0 .........................................................................................169

RADIO BRANCH.................................................................................................................170
Verify/modify the duplex frequency................................................................................170
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on ...........................170
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier .......................................................171
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter .................................................................171
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) ...................................................171
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)...............................................172
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC..............................................................172
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter ....................................172
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation................................................................173
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device................................................................173
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile .................................................................................................................173
Radio Branch contextual area ........................................................................................174
ODU Settings tab...................................................................................................174
ODU Powers tab ....................................................................................................175
MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................................................177
S/N Meas ...................................................................................................................178

6 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Verify the value of the S/N measure .........................................................................178
Update the value of the S/N measure .......................................................................178
S/N Meas. contextual area ......................................................................................179
Radio BER ..................................................................................................................180
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure .....................180
Activate the measure (BER and error count) ..............................................................180
Deactivate the measure (BER and error count) ..........................................................180
Radio BER contextual area ......................................................................................181
Radio Loop .................................................................................................................182
Verify the radio loops status ....................................................................................182
Activate a radio loop ..............................................................................................182
Deactivate a radio loop...........................................................................................182
Radio Loop contextual area .....................................................................................183
Manual Operations.......................................................................................................184
Verify the manual operations status .........................................................................184
Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter ..............................................................................184
Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier .........................................................184
Activate/deactivate a radio loop ...............................................................................185
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ................................................................185
Force the use of a synchronism source .....................................................................186
Manual Operations contextual area ..........................................................................187
RMON ........................................................................................................................188
Settings ...............................................................................................................189
Verify the count status of the RMon statistics.......................................................189
Activate the count of the RMon statistics .............................................................189
Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics .........................................................190
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics ............................190
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics .......................190
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the
RMon statistics ................................................................................................191
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count
of the RMon statistics .......................................................................................192
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics ........192
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics...193
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the
history of the RMON statistics ............................................................................193
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the
history of the RMON statistics ............................................................................194
Settings contextual area ...................................................................................195
Ethernet Statistics tab ................................................................................195
Ethernet History tab ...................................................................................196
Ethernet Service Statistics tab .....................................................................196
Ethernet Service History tab ........................................................................197
Ethernet Statistics .................................................................................................199
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) ............199
Ethernet Statistics contextual area .....................................................................200
Ethernet Service Statistics ......................................................................................203
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority
and Port & C-VID/S-VID) ..................................................................................203
Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area ..........................................................204
Ethernet History ....................................................................................................206
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port).........................206
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) .................................206
Ethernet History contextual area ........................................................................207

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 7


Ethernet Service History .........................................................................................209
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and
Port & C-VID/S-VID) ........................................................................................209
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and
Port & C-VID/S-VID) ........................................................................................209
Ethernet Service History contextual area.............................................................210
RMon standard (info)........................................................................................211

ALARMS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 213

OPERATIONS LIST ............................................................................................................... 217

PARAMETERS LIST ............................................................................................................... 225

ASSISTANCE SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 229

8 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


MANUAL CONTENT

This manual describes the commands and the functionalities of the WEB Local Craft Terminal application
(release 1.2) present in the equipment ALFOplus80HD.

The WEB LCT release present in the equipment can be verified opening the relevant WEB Local Craft Ter-
minal page and selecting Main > Equipment Properties - General Info tab - WEB LCT Version parameter.

In this manual, to make the writing easier, the wording:


• WEB LCT identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal application for ALFOplus80HD.
• WEB LCT page identifies the WEB Local Craft Terminal page for ALFOplus80HD.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 9


WEB LCT APPLICATION

The WEB LCT application allows a user connecting to equipment via his own machine (PC, Workstation,
etc.) using the operating system and the Web browser at his disposal.

WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller. It does not require any additional module
installed on the user PC (see Installation).

At start-up of WEB LCT, the browser displays the WEB Local Craft Terminal (WEB LCT) page that is the
application graphical interface (GUI).

The WEB LCT page can be opened directly from browser (see Open/close the WEB LCT page - Fig.1).

Through WEB LCT application, the user can check the equipment operating status and directly intervene
to manage it, verifying/modifying the configuration parameters (see Functionalities and Menu and com-
mands (Equipment Menu).

Fig.1 WEB LCT application (start-up of the WEB LCT page from browser)

User PC
Equipment
(e.g. 172.18.60.33) Browser
Supervision NE management
Controller WEB LCT page
port (HTTP)
equipment
WEB LCT (172.18.60.33)
application Internet
FTP
FTP Server Help Web
Server
*

Web Lct Console Help file


* See Installation

10 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


FUNCTIONALITIES

Through the WEB LCT application, it is possible to manage:

• The properties (identifier, addresses, reference date/time, hardware, features key, etc.) and to
execute the reset of the equipment software (Equipment Properties).
• The measures of Performance Monitoring (Performance Monitoring).
• The log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by the users and the equip-
ment configuration (Report & Logger).
• The Wake Up trap (NMS Wake Up Config.).
• The equipment software/firmware and the restore of the default equipment settings (Software
Info & Maint.).
• The backup/restore of the whole equipment configuration (Backup/Restore Config.).
• The forward status of the alarms and their severity (Alarm Severity Config.).
• The equipment users list (Group/User Management).
• The equipment general configuration (radio configuration, modulation/capacity, adaptive mod-
ulation, etc.) (Equipment).
• The Ethernet Switch main configuration (Base Band).
• The sources and the outputs of synchronism (Synchronisation).
• The radio parameters (Radio Branch).
• The maintenance parameters (S/N, Radio BER, Radio loops, RMon) (Maintenance).
• The remote element list (Remote elements list area)
• The manual operations and the relevant timeout (Equipment status area).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 11


LIMITS

The following limits must be considered for every single piece of equipment.

Remote equipment list


Maximum number of equipment in the list: 100
Maximum number of stations in the list: 30
Remote equipment list (info)

User list
Maximum number of groups in the list: 10
Maximum number of users in the list: 10
Users management (info)

WEB LCT Session


Maximum number of equipment which can be connected at the same time by means of a single
WEB LCT session: 1

Login to equipment
Maximum number of contemporary connections (login): 10
The system supports at most 10 groups, 10 users and 10 login at the same time.
As regards the logged users, these are distributed in the following mode:
CLI users* connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 10.
SNMP users** connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 10.
WEB users*** connected at the same time to a piece of equipment: 4.

* CLI user. User of SM-OS (Siae Microelettronica - Operating System) application.


** SNMP user. User of NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.
*** WEB user. User of WEB LCT application.

Area Events
Maximum number of signals in the area Events: 500

12 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


CHARACTERS SET

The GUI accepts and recognizes the character set defined by the ISO/IEC 8859-1.
Only exception are the fields relevant to the management of user/groups, which accept and recognize only
the characters 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 13


INSTALLATION

WEB LCT
WEB LCT is an application resident in the equipment controller.
It does not require any installation on the user PC.
At the first equipment switch-on, the user can immediately connect to it via WEB LCT because
the application is already present in the controller.
Then you can Update the software/firmware of the equipment.

Add-ins
As help to equipment WEB LCT for the management of:
• FTP protocol, it is necessary to install the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server
(see FTP protocol (info).
• Help online of WEB LCT (Help Web Server), it is necessary to install the program
WEB Lct Console.
The instructions for the installation of the Web Lct Console (WLC) are reported in the relevant
manuals. WEB LCT Console work in MS Windows® environment.
WARNING ALFOplus80HD equipment is managed from version 1.2.0 of WLC or later.

Help online
WEB LCT is equipped with a help on-line which can be opened selecting the option [Help] or
in WEB LCT page.
The help on-line must be installed on one’s PC using the installation file specific for the WEB LCT
of the equipment you wish to use.

14 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


WEB LOCAL CRAFT TERMINAL (WEB LCT) PAGE

Open/close the WEB LCT page


Elements of the WEB LCT page
Messages displayed in the WEB LCT page

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 15


OPEN/CLOSE THE WEB LCT PAGE

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser


Open more WEB LCT pages
Close the WEB LCT page

Open the WEB LCT page from Browser

WARNING If Ethernet connection is used, checks or settings are not generally necessary. Only if more net-
work cards are equipped, it will be necessary to select the card you wish to use (Host Adapter) (see Web
Lct Console user manual).

The following procedure requires that:


• The relevant WEB LCT application is present on the equipment which you are connecting to.
• The user, you wish to use to open the WEB LCT page, is valid. With valid user (username/pass-
word) we mean a user present in the users list stored in the controller (see Users management
(info).
For the first connection or after a Factory Default operation (see Advanced tab) use the creden-
tials Username: admin, Password: admin.

The opening of the WEB LCT page is supported with:


• Internet Explorer 9 or later.
• Firefox 4.0 or later.

As help to WEB LCT application, run the program WEB Lct Console version 1.2.0 or later for the manage-
ment of FTP Server and of Help Web Server. Alternatively, for the management of FTP, it is possible to use
a FTP Server already present on PC (see FTP protocol (info).

1. Run a browser.

2. In the address box type the IP Address of the equipment.


The WEB LCT login page opens.

3. Type the name of the user, in the Username box.

4. Type the password, in the Password box.

5. Check the Remember Me box if you wish that, on the next opening of the application, the current user
name and password are automatically displayed; otherwise uncheck the considered box.

6. Press Login.
If the typed values are correct, the system displays the WEB LCT page of the equipment (see Fig.2).
As regards the messages that can be displayed during the start procedure of WEB LCT see Messages
displayed in the WEB LCT page.

Open more WEB LCT pages

It is possible to open:
• More WEB LCT pages on more machines or on the same machine, using the same user or dif-
ferent users.
• Only one WEB LCT page relevant to the same equipment.
• More WEB LCT pages relevant to different equipment.

For more information about the limits of the application, refer to the Limits paragraph.

16 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Close the WEB LCT page

Select the [Logout] parameter.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 17


ELEMENTS OF THE WEB LCT PAGE

1 - Equipment Menu area


2 - Equipment info area
3 - Users area
4 - Remote elements list area
5 - Contextual area
6 - Equipment status area

Fig.2 shows an example of WEB LCT page on an ALFOplus80HD equipment.

Fig.2 Elements of the WEB LCT page (ALFOplus80HD)

3
1 2

5 4

18 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Equipment Menu area

This area contains the commands to manage the equipment configuration (see Fig.2).

Commands
The commands are subdivided in groups:
Main. Commands to manage the general equipment parameters: supervision ports,
Routing Table, Performance Monitoring measures, etc.
Equipment, Synchronisation, etc. Commands to manage the configuration parame-
ters typical of the equipment type which the WEB LCT page refers to.
For the description of every group/command see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu).

The selection of a group expands or compresses the list of the underlaying commands. At each
selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if compressed it becomes
expanded, or vice versa). The symbol:
identifies an expanded group.
identifies a compressed group.

It is possible:
• Expand all the groups at the same time, pressing
• Compress all the groups at the same time, pressing .
The symbol identifies a command which, once selected, displays the parameters associated
to it in the context area (see Contextual area).

Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Menu area is displayed.
Press to hide the area. Press to display the area again.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 19


Equipment info area

This area shows the equipment general properties.

Parameters
Equipment Type. Equipment type.

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

Agent IP. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.

Bridge Mode. Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch:
• Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch
operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN.
• Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q.
• Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with one S-VLAN component and
at least one C-VLAN component.

Tables
LEFT TABLE (see Fig.2). Status and radio parameters of the transmitter and receiver.
Every row of the table corresponds to a radio branch for which is displayed:
Branch which the data, present in the relevant row, refer to:
• Tx1A. Operating status and parameters of the branch relevant to transmis-
sion.
• Rx1A. Operating status and parameters of the branch relevant to reception.
RF frequency. The wording:
• ODU Hardware Failure. Hardware problem.
• Must be Set. The specific frequency is not set.
Power in input to the receiver (line Rx1A) and in output to the transmitter (line Tx1A).
Both the powers are measured at the antenna flange.
The wording Tx Off (line Tx1A) indicates that the transmitter is off because of an action
of the user (see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter - selection of Off or Per-
manent Off option) or because of the activation of one or more alarms which cause the
switch-off of the transmitter (for example, RADIO Vco Fail Alarm).

RIGHT TABLE. Channel/modulation and the Ethernet radio traffic (Tx/Rx):


Bandwidth & Modulation. Current channel and modulation.
ETH Capacity. Radio capacity reserved to Ethernet tributaries.

Update data
The information present in the Equipment Info area is updated every 15 seconds (timeout).

Press to force the Equipment Info area updating.

Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Equipment Info area is displayed.
Press to hide the area. Press to display the area again.

20 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Users area

User Profile parameter


[Logout] parameter
[Open Far End] parameter
[Help] parameter

User Profile parameter

Profile of the user who has opened the WEB LCT page.

Options
Admin. The user has Administrator profile.
The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or change the
equipment configuration with no exception.

Read/Write. The user has Read/Write profile.


The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or execute changes
to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the user list,
aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those operations avail-
able only to the Admin. user.

Maint. The user has Maintenance profile.


The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance operations
(MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area and Radio BER contextual area.

Read Only. The user has Read Only profile.


The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

Login/Logout
At the opening of the WEB LCT page, the user will be connected to the equipment with the user/
profile entered during the login request.
In any moment it is possible to execute the logout and re-execute the login using the same or
a different user with respect to that used for the login.

NMS
If the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system, the supervi-
sory system considers the connection of a WEB user with Read Only or Maintenance profile a
WEB LCT connection in Monitoring mode.
While the supervisory system considers the connection to the equipment of a WEB user with
Read/Write or Administrator profile a WEB LCT connection in Configuration mode.

[Logout] parameter

This parameter executes the logout of the current user.


When selected, the WEB LCT page to login to the equipment is displayed.
To reconnect equipment, set Username and Password and press Login.

[Open Far End] parameter

This parameter opens the WEB LCT page of remote equipment to contained in the Remote Element Table.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 21


Operations
Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment (Remote Link)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select the [Open Far End] parameter.


If the remote equipment list contains:
• Only one item of equipment of type Remote Link, the WEB LCT login page of the remote equip-
ment is displayed.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to
activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment
is displayed.
If the WEB LCT login page is not displayed when the login is required, this means that the remote
equipment is unreachable.
• No equipment of type Remote Link, a message is displayed pointing out the absence of the re-
mote equipment.
• More equipment of type Remote Link, the Available Remote Elements window is displayed, con-
taining the list of equipment configured as Remote Link present in the remote equipment list.
For each equipment, the following characteristics are reported:
• Station. Station name.
• Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
• IP Address. IP address.
• OSI. Parameter not meaningful in this context.
Select the remote equipment and press Open or double click on the equipment.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to
activate the connection and press Login. In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment
is displayed.

[Help] parameter

This parameter opens the help online of application.

The message Unable to contact help support... indicates that the program WEB Lct Console necessary for
the management of the Help Web Server has not been started (see Installation).

22 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Remote elements list area

In this area, you can manage the remote equipment list stored in the equipment controller.

Parameters
Station/Equip. Name of the station and equipment in the list.

STATION ( )
Equipment is subdivided into stations.
Selecting the symbol of a station expands or compress the list of underlaying equipment.
At each selection, the list takes the status complementary to the previous one (if com-
pressed it becomes expanded and vice versa).
The name of the station is assigned by the user during the creation of the station itself.
The stations are displayed in the same order as they are inserted in the list.
An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, cannot be stored in the
list.

EQUIPMENT ( or )
The symbol represents the equipment of type Remote Link (see column Type). The
symbol represents other types of the equipment.
The name of the equipment is automatically assigned by the application during the cre-
ation of the equipment itself: Equipment <progressive number>.
Within the station, the equipment are listed in increasing order with respect to the IP ad-
dress.

IP Addr. IP address (Agent SNMP) of the equipment.

Type. Type of equipment:


• Managed by SCT. Equipment managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
• Remote Link. Equipment, managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application, consti-
tuting the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to
the local equipment (equipment which the user is connected to by WEB LCT).
• Elem. Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where
the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
• Not Managed. Element not managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
• Nodal X. Equipment belonging to the local node.
With local node we mean a set of minimum 2 and maximum 8 equipment (ALCplus2/
ALCplus2e) interconnected by a Ethernet nodal Bus and/or by a TDM nodal Bus,
where the considered equipment is an element. The X value correspond to a number
between 1 and 8 and indicates the subset.
• 2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.
• 2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1
configuration.

OSI. Equipment NSAP (GOSIP) Address.


Parameter available only for the equipment managed with the OSI protocol.

Push-button
GENERAL AREA

Apply. Confirm the changes.


Refresh. Update the list.
Clear. Reset the remote equipment list
Open. Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)
STATION AREA

Add. Add a station to the list


Remove. Remove a station of the list
Rename. Rename a station of the list

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 23


ELEMENT AREA

Add. Add equipment to the list


Remove. Remove equipment from the list

Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Remote elements list area is hidden.
Press to hide the area. Press to display the area again.

See also
Remote equipment list (info)

Add a station to the list

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING It is possible to insert a maximum of 30 stations into a list.

1. In the Remote elements list area, press Add (Station group).

2. Type, into the text box, the name to be assigned to the station (alphanumeric string with minimum 1
and maximum 11 characters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.

3. Press OK.
The application displays the new station into the Remote elements list area, at the end of the list rele-
vant to the already existing stations.

4. Press Apply and confirm.


An empty station, that is a station without associated equipment, is not saved in the list.

Rename a station of the list

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be renamed.

2. Press Rename.
3. Type, into the text box, the new name (alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 11 char-
acters).
The program does not create two stations with the same name in the same list. Moreover, a digit cannot
be used as first character and the space character cannot be used at the beginning or within the name
string.

4. Press OK.
The application displays the new name of the station into the Remote elements list area.

5. Press Apply and confirm.

24 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Remove a station of the list

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The deleting of the station causes also the removal of all pieces of equipment coupled with such
a station.

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to be removed.

2. Press Remove (Station group).


The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Add equipment to the list

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING It is possible to add to the list a maximum of 100 equipment.


Equipment cannot be created if at least one station has not been created before.

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the station to which the equipment has to be coupled.
If the user does not select any station, the application will automatically couple the equipment with the
last selected station.
2. Press Add (Element group).

3. Into the IP Address box, type the IP address of the equipment.


The program does not create two pieces of equipment with the same IP Address in the same list (even
if in different stations).

4. Set the Type of element box, selecting the option relevant to the element type to be inserted:
• Managed By SCT. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
• Remote Link. Equipment managed by the WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application that constitutes
the equipment placed on the other end of the radio connection with respect to the local equip-
ment.
• Element Manager. Element Manager of the equipment (IP address of the machine where the
NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system resides).
• Not Managed. Element not managed by WEB LCT and/or SCT/LMT application.
This option can be used to insert into the remote equipment list for instance the coupling be-
tween the IP address and the NSAP (Gosip) one piece of equipment inserted into an OSI net-
work.
• 2x1+1-Xpic-Main. IDU Master belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.
Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the re-
mote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.
• 2x1+1-Xpic-Res. IDU Reserve belonging to an ALCplus2e equipment in XPIC 1+1 configuration.
Option to use only if problems have occurred regarding the automatic configuration of the re-
mote equipment list during the creation of a XPIC 1+1 system.

5. Press OK.
In the Remote elements list area, under the selected station, a record named Equipment <progressive
number> is displayed with the characteristics of the new equipment.

6. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 25


Remove equipment from the list

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area, select the equipment to be removed.

2. Press Remove (Equipment group).


The application removes the station from the Remote elements list area.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Reset the remote equipment list

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area, press Clear.


The application clears all the records (stations and equipment) present into the Remote elements list
area.

2. Press Apply and confirm.

Open the WEB LCT page of equipment of the list (Remote Link)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. In the Remote elements list area select the equipment of Remote Link type to be opened the WEB LCT
page.

2. Press Open.
The WEB LCT page to login to the remote equipment opens.
3. Type the name (Username box) and the access code (Password box) of the WEB user to use to activate
the connection and press Login.
In a new page the WEB LCT of the remote equipment is displayed.

26 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Remote equipment list (info)

Each equipment has a remote equipment list stored in its own controller.

With remote equipment list we mean a list containing all the network remote equipment which you wish
to connect to.

For a better vision of the equipment during the setting of the list, it is possible to subdivide the equipment
into stations, in such a way that, at the selection of a station, the application will display only the detail of
the equipment associated with such a specific station. The station does not have any particular meaning;
it has been simply introduced to help the user during the localization of the equipment.

Into each remote equipment list, it is possible to create a maximum of 100 equipment and 30 station.

The remote equipment list can be used to connect, at the same time, to more equipment only if the pro-
gram WEB LCT is available.

When the user requests the connection to a generic equipment present into the network (local equipment),
at the connection of such equipment, the WEB LCT program reads its remote equipment list and automat-
ically forwards the connection command to all pieces of equipment present into the list.

In such a way, the application displays, into the Station List area of the WEB LCT window, all the stations
that group the equipment and, into the Equipment List area (selecting the relevant station), it displays the
functional status of the local equipment (that results in connected/login status) and the functional status
of all the remote equipment present into the list. The equipment that have answered to the connection
request of the application will result in connected/monitor status.

The application will cyclically forward the connection command, to the equipment that have not answered
to the connection request, until to:
• It is deactivated the connection with the local equipment.
• The user disables the equipment.
• The equipment is deleted from the remote equipment list of the local equipment.

More information concerning the WEB LCT program are reported into the relevant manuals.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 27


Contextual area

This area is the part of the WEB LCT page where the equipment parameters are displayed.
Its content changes accordingly to the selected command in the Equipment Menu area, which is indicated
in the top part of the contextual area.

Push-button
Apply. Selecting it makes the changes, executed on the parameters present in the contextual
area, effective.
Its selection opens a confirmation window. The confirmation windows are timed. When this pe-
riod is elapsed (pointed out by the progress bar), if the user has not confirmed the operation,
the window is closed and the operation cancelled.
The confirmation window displays the option Don’t ask again. Activate the option to avoid the
system displays the confirmation request when Apply is selected in any context of WEB LCT
page. This setting remains valid until the exit from the current session (logout or page closing).
If the Apply push-button is not available:
• It is not possible to execute changes because the user profile does not allow this or
the equipment is in connected/monitor status.
• No parameter present in the window has been modified. In this case, the push-button
becomes available when the value of a parameter is changed.
• Another push-button is present in the contextual area for the confirmation of the op-
eration or the change of the parameters.
Refresh. Force the reading of the data from equipment.
If the push-button is not available, the connection with the equipment is not active.

Help. Open the help on-line.

WARNING For some commands, other push-buttons are displayed relevant only to the context
which contains them. These push-buttons are described in the paragraph relevant to the specific
command.

Tabs
For some commands, the parameters are subdivided in tabs. The selection of a tab dynamically
changes the content of the contextual area.

Parameters
The parameters present in the contextual area can be read-only or set or modified.
The description of the single commands (see Menu and commands (Equipment Menu) indicates
the parameters which can be modified and modalities to do that.
Generally, for the parameter setting, the following rules are valid:
• Entering a value (alphanumeric string) in a text box.
If a red line is displayed below the text box, the entered value is not allowed because,
for example, a number of characters greater than the allowed one or an invalid value
has been entered (for example, entering of value 172.18.70.334 as IP address).
• Box with possible values displayed in a drop-down menu.
When the value is changed, a red triangle is displayed in the top left edge of the box.
It signals that the value has been changed, but the change has not been communi-
cated yet to the equipment (pressure of push-button Apply).

28 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Equipment status area

This area shows the functional status of the equipment.

Parameters
URGENT <alarms number>. Number of Critical and/or Major alarms. Colour box:
• Orange. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Major severity
• Red. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Critical severity.
• Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Critical or Major severity.
Select the box to display the active alarm.

NOT URG. <alarms number>. Number of Minor and/or Warning alarms. Colour box:
• Light blue. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Warning severity.
• Yellow. The most serious alarm present into the equipment has Minor severity.
• Grey. The equipment has no active alarms with Minor or Warning severity.
Select the box to display the active alarm.

DOWNLOAD. Update of the equipment software/firmware. Colour box:


• Light blue. The update is in progress.
• Grey. The update is not in progress.

MAN. OP. Activation of the manual operations. Colour box:


• Light blue. A manual forcing is enabled (e.g. a loop).
• Grey. No manual forcing is active.

Events (area). List of the status/alarm signals of the equipment.


Each signal corresponds to a record that is displayed:
• Colour box. Signal type and alarm gravity:
• Green/Status. Status signal.
• Light blue/Warning. Alarm detected with Warning severity.
• Yellow/Minor. Alarm detected with Minor severity.
• Orange/Major. Alarm detected with Major severity.
• Red/Critical. Alarm detected with Critical severity.
• White/Cleared. Alarm detected/cleared.
• Alphanumeric string which details the nature of the signal.
• Logic group which the signal belongs to: COMMON, etc.
• Date/time of the signal detection.
If the row refers to a detected/cleared alarm, the date/time of alarm detection will be
pointed out under the date/time of alarm clearing.
The date/time is set by the network element that has generated the signal. The for-
mat of date/time changes depending on the setting made in the operating system.

Operations
Verify the active manual operations
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout

Update data
The information present in the Events area are dynamically updated when an alarm is generated
or cleared.

Press to force the Events area updating and remove the detected and cleared alarms (box
White/Cleared).

Display/hide area
When the WEB page is opened, the Events area is displayed.
Press to hide the area. Press to display the area again.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 29


See also
Alarms management (info)

Verify the active manual operations

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select the MAN. OP box.


A window displays the manual operations actually activated into the equipment.
The wording None active manual operation shows that no manual operation is active.
The information are not dynamically updated. Press to update the information.

Verify/modify the manual operation timeout

User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The timeout setting is common for all the manual forcing operations of the equipment.

1. Select the MAN. OP box.


The Manual Operation Timeout box displays the current timeout of the manual operations.
Value 0 indicates that the timeout has not been activated, this means that the activation of a manual
operation remains active until when the user deactivates it. The activation of a manual forcing (for in-
stance a loop) affects the traffic.

2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 172800 sec. (48 hours).
The setting of the value 0 corresponds to the disabling of the timeout.

3. Press Change and confirm.

30 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


MESSAGES DISPLAYED IN THE WEB LCT PAGE

Opening page
Login Failed! Invalid User o Password!. It means that the typed username and/or password is
wrong and/or not present in the equipment user list.

The equipment is update protected by element manager, retry to login as Read Only user. It
means that the equipment is managed also by the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system and
the NMS5UX user has prevented the possibility, for the WEB user, to be able to execute the login
of the equipment. In this case, it is necessary that the NMS5UX user enables again the WEB user
for the execution of the operation.

Too many WEB users!. It means that the equipment has been connected to the maximum num-
ber of allowed users (see Limits).

Open page
When the page is open, self-explanatory messages are usually displayed about the result of an opera-
tion or the impossibility to carry out an action because of the incongruence of the selected parameters.
Moreover, one of the following messages can be displayed:

Warning. Invalid or time-out session. You will be redirected to login form The equipment is in
disconnected status. In this condition, the parameters cannot be verified/modified.
Press Ok to display the WEB LCT page of login to the equipment. Fill the fields Username and
Password and press Login to reconnect to the equipment.

Access Denied. The selected context is available only to the user with profile Administrator.

Warning: You are forcing a manual operation. Operation timeout: <value>. The setting you wish
to execute is a manual operation subjected to timeout.
For each equipment, a timeout can be set after which the relevant active manual operations are
automatically deactivated. The wording No Timeout indicates that the timeout is disabled; this
means that a manual operation remains active until when the user deactivates it.
Loading The request of data is in progress between the PC and the equipment.

Updating, Applying Changes The sending of data is in progress between the PC and the equip-
ment.

Operation Fail! Unable to Get or Update parameter(s). Wrong user profile or not logged yet! The
operation cannot be executed because the user profile in use is not enabled to execute the action
or is not logged to the equipment yet.
Not Implemented Yet!. The command is not available for the current version of the program.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 31


MENU AND COMMANDS (EQUIPMENT MENU)

Main. It manages the general equipment parameters.


Equipment. It manages the radio equipment configuration.
Base Band. It manages the Ethernet Switch main configuration and the DCN parameters.
Synchronisation. It manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism.
Radio Branch. It manages the Radio parameters.
Maintenance. It manages the maintenance parameters (S/N, Radio BER, Radio loops, RMon).

The description of every single command indicates the status of login/user profile (User Profile parameter)
necessary to use the command or execute the relevant procedures.

32 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


MAIN

Equipment Properties. It manages the basic configuration of equipment.


Performance Monitoring. It manages the Performance Monitoring measures.
Report & Logger. It manages the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by
the users and the equipment configuration.
NMS Wake Up Config. It manages the Wake Up trap.
Software Info & Maint. It manages the equipment software/firmware and the restore of the default
equipment settings.
Backup/Restore Config. It manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment configuration.
Alarm Severity Config. It manages the alarm transmission and their severity.
Group/User Management. It manages the users list of the equipment.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 33


Equipment Properties
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Equipment Properties command manages the basic configuration of the equipment.

Operations
Verify the basic configuration of the equipment
Modify the equipment identifier
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment
Execute the equipment software reset
Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC
Verify the equipment feature
Enable a new equipment feature
Verify the equipment units

GUI
Equipment Properties contextual area

Verify the basic configuration of the equipment

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.


The General Info tab displays the basic configuration of the equipment.

Modify the equipment identifier

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

2. In the Equipment ID field set an alphanumeric string with minimum 1 and maximum 50 characters.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

2. In the Agent IP Address box type the new IP address.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Execute the equipment software reset

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.
Operation is no traffic affecting.

34 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

2. Press System Restart and confirm.

Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of the PC

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING The operation could cause the logout of the user.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

2. Press Align to PC time and confirm.


The values present in the System Date/Time area are updated by the values of one’s PC.

Verify the equipment feature

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.


2. Select the Equipment Features tab.
The tab displays the equipment feature enabled on demand.

Enable a new equipment feature

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active. In the latter
case, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server
and the certificate must be present into a sub-folder of the Shared Folder set during the configuration of
FTP Server (see FTP protocol (info).
In order to enable one or more features, IT IS NECESSARY to require the enabling certificate, represented
by a file (with sfc extension), to the company that provides the equipment.
For each equipment you wish to enable one or more feature, a specific enabling certificate is required, be-
cause there is an univocal link between each certificate and each specific equipment.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

2. Select the Equipment Features tab.

3. Press Upgrade.

4. In the Cert. file path, type the path/name of the certificate.


If you use the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..).
Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and
the filename of the Shared Folder).

5. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server (if not otherwise set at the con-
figuration of FTP Server, it corresponds to the Ip address of the PC).

6. Press Send.
A message indicates the end and the result of the operation:
• Operation Done. The operation has been executed with success.
• Invalid operation for this equipment…. The selected certificate and equipment are not compati-
ble (wrong serial number or wrong MIB version, etc.).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 35


Verify the equipment units

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Equipment Properties.

2. Select the Equipment Units tab.


The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.

36 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Equipment Properties contextual area

The contextual area displays the basic configuration of the equipment.

Tabs
General Info tab. Equipment properties: type, ID, IP address, software/firmware version, date/
time.
Equipment Features tab. Functionalities enabled for the equipment.
Equipment Units tab. Equipment units.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Equipment Properties (command)

General Info tab

The tab displays the general equipment properties.

Parameters
Equipment Type. Equipment type.
Ethernet Bridge Mode. Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch:
• Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode. In this mode, the Switch
operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN.
• Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q.
• Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode. In this mode, the
Switch operates as a Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with one S-VLAN component and
at least one C-VLAN component.

Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.

Agent IP Address. IP Address assigned to the agent SNMP of the equipment.

IP Address. IP Address of the equipment.

MAC Address. Physical address of the equipment.

Firmware Version. Identification code and version of the equipment software/firmware pre-
sent on the memory bench in use.

WEB LCT Version. Version of the WEB LCT application for ALFOplus80HD present into the
equipment.
WEB LCT Product Code. Identification code of the WEB LCT application for ALFOplus80HD pre-
sent into the equipment.

System Up Time. Days, hours, minutes and seconds since the last restart of the equipment.
Date / Time. Reference date and time of the equipment.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.

Push-button
System Restart. Execute the equipment software reset
Align to PC time. Align the reference date/time of the equipment to the current date/time of
the PC

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 37


See also
Modify the equipment identifier
Modify the IP address of the agent SNMP of the equipment

Equipment Features tab

The tab displays the list of the equipment feature enabled on demand.

Parameters
FEATURE NAME

• Upgrade up to 4QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 4 QAM.


• Upgrade up to 16QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 16 QAM.
• Upgrade up to 64QAM. Maximum equipment modulation up to 64 QAM.
• Upgrade up to 250M. Channel spacing up to 250 MHz.
• Upgrade up to 500M. Channel spacing up to 500 MHz.
• ACM. Enabling adaptive modulation.
• 1+0 Stand alone configuration. Enabling of stand-alone (without IDU) operation of
the equipment.
• Eth transport. Enabling of Ethernet transport.
• Eth OAM. OAM-FM functionality for Ethernet network.
• Sync Eth. Use of Ethernet synchronism sources.
• Sync quality management. Management of synchronisation quality.
• Packet processing (1). Optional Ethernet processing.
• Enhanced eth monitoring. Monitoring of Enhanced Ethernet.
• Eth ring protection. Ring Protection modality management.
• Security package. Equipment security protocols management.
FEATURE STATUS

• Enabled. The functionality is enabled.


• Disabled. The functionality is not enabled.

Push-button
Upgrade. Enable a new equipment feature

Equipment Units tab

The tab displays the characteristics of the equipment units.


Every row of the table corresponds to an unit.

Parameters
Real Type. Unit type really present into the equipment. The wording Unequipped indicates that
the unit is not physically present into the equipment.

Expected Type. Foreseen unit type. The wording Unequipped indicates that the unit is not fore-
seen.

HW Ver. Unit version.

Part Number. Part Number of the unit.

Par. Part Number. Part Number of the group that contains the unit. Usually the group repre-
sents the equipment part that can be replaced. Not all the unit are into a group. In this case the
field will result empty and the part that can be replaced will correspond to the unit itself.

Serial Number. Series Number of the group that contains the unit. If the unit is not contained
into a group (Par Part Num field empty), the Series Number refers to the unit.

38 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Unit Alarms. Functional status of the unit. Each box identifies an alarm:
• Fail. The units is affected by a serious malfunctioning.
• Missing. The unit is not present into the equipment (Unequipped wording - Real Type
parameter) also if it is foreseen (unit name - Expected Type parameter).
• Not Resp. The unit does not answer to the program interrogations.
• HW Mism. The real unit (Real Type parameter) is different from the foreseen one (Ex-
pected Type parameter).
• SW Mism. The software/firmware version present into the controller of the peripheral
unit (Actual Release) is different from the one of the memory bench in Running status
(Release Bench) (see Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment).

The colour of the boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Criti-
cal, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.
• White. Alarm deactivated.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 39


Performance Monitoring
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Performance Monitoring command manages the Performance Monitoring measures.

Operations
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure
Activate one or more PM measures
Deactivate one or more PM measures
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures
Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)

GUI
Performance Monitoring contextual area

See also
PM measures available
PM measures (info)

Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.


2. Press Open new performance window.
The Performances [none selected] window displays the PM measures.
The measures are subdivided in groups.
The group and the relevant measures (group > measure) available are the following:
G828 > Radio 1A, checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
RxPwr > Radio 1A, checks the power of the signal at reception.
TxPwr > Radio 1A, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
ACM > Radio 1A, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.

3. Select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.
For every measure is pointed out the status:
• (Stop.). The measure is not on progress.
• (Run.). The measure is on progress.

Below the measure, more options are pointed out: seconds, blocks, Rlts, etc. depending on the type of
selected measure.
Every option indicates the measurement unit of the control parameters for which you wish to display
the results and the threshold exceeding alarms.
This subdivision is necessary because the results of the control parameters cannot be graphically dis-
played by means of different measurement units.

4. Select the wished measuring unit.


The Performances [group / measure / measurement unit] window displays the results of the control
parameters, in graphic and table format, and the status of the threshold exceeding alarms.
If the measurement has never been activated, the window will result empty.
The items in the Performances window are described in Tab.1.

It is possible to open more Performances... window pressing again Open new performance window
or pressing Open New Window present in the Performances.... window itself.

40 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Activate one or more PM measures

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.

2. Press Open new performance window.

3. To activate:
• All measures in a group, select the group.
• Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Start and confirm.


The not active measure(s) are started and their status passes from (Stop.) to (Run.).

Deactivate one or more PM measures

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.

2. Press Open new performance window.

3. To deactivate:
• All measures in a group, select the group.
• Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Stop and confirm.


The active measure(s) are stopped and their status passes from (Run.) to (Stop.).

Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.


2. Press Open new performance window.

3. To reset the threshold exceeding alarms of:


• All measures in a group, select the group.
• Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Clear Alarms and confirm.


For the selected measure, active alarms are deactivated except for the unavailability alarms.

Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.

2. Press Open new performance window.

3. To reset the values of the records daily and primary of:


• All measures in a group, select the group.
• Single measure, select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.

4. Press Clear Counters and confirm.


The values displayed into table are reset.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 41


Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.

2. Press Open new performance window.

3. Select the group that contains the measure and than the wished measure.
4. Press Commons.

If G828 > Radio 1A measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters:
• General area. Threshold levels of the UAS parameter:
• N Ses Set UAS(P) (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of consecutive seconds with
SES) over which starts the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10), press Apply
and confirm.
• N Ses Reset UAS(Q) (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of consecutive seconds
without SES) over which ends the UAS unavailability period.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 10 sec (default 10), press Apply
and confirm.
The threshold (expressed as percentage of the errored blocks) over which it is declared a SES
is 30% and is not changeable.
Press to compress the area. Press to expand the area.
• 15M Es Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute peri-
od, when ES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm.
The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
• 24H Es Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when ES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Es.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and con-
firm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
• 15M Ses Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute pe-
riod, when SES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm.
The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
• 24H Ses Threshold (sec.). Threshold (expressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period,
when SES has occurred) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Ses.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and con-
firm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
• 15M Sep Threshold (events). Threshold (expressed as number of SEP events within a 15 minute
period) over which it is activated the alarm 15M Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 900 (default 0), press Apply and confirm.
The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.
• 24H Sep Threshold (events). Threshold (expressed as number of SEP events within a 24 hour
period) over which it is activated the alarm 24H Sep.
To change the parameter set a value between 1 and 86400 (default 0), press Apply and con-
firm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of the alarm.

If RxPwr > Radio 1A measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters:
• 15M Rlts Thresholds area. 15M Rlts alarms threshold:
• Rlts 1 (sec.), Rlts 2 (sec.), Rlts 3 (sec.), Rlts 4 (sec.), Rlts 5 (sec.). Threshold levels (ex-
pressed as number of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the received power is
lower than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels) over which the system
activates the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default
0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold
and accordingly of the alarm.
• 24H Rlts Thresholds area. 24H Rlts alarms threshold:
• Rlts 1 (sec.), Rlts 2 (sec.), Rlts 3 (sec.), Rlts 4 (sec.), Rlts 5 (sec.). Threshold levels (ex-
pressed as number of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the received power is lower

42 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


than the RLT1, RLT2, RLT3, RLT4, RLT5 threshold levels) over which the system activates
the relevant alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default
0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold
and accordingly of the alarm.
• Rlt Thresholds area. Threshold levels of the received power:
• Rlt 1 (dBm), Rlt 2 (dBm), Rlt 3 (dBm), Rlt 4 (dBm), Rlt 5 (dBm). Respectively the first,
the second, the third, the fourth and the fifth threshold level of the received power.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between -100dBm and -
20dBm.
Press to compress an area. Press to expand the area.

If TxPwr > Radio 1A measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters:
• 15M Tlts Thresholds area. 15M Tlts alarms threshold:
• Tlts 1 (sec.), Tlts 2 (sec.), Tlts 3 (sec.), Tlts 4 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as num-
ber of seconds, within a 15 minute period, when the transmitted power is higher than the
TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default
0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold
and accordingly of the alarm.
• 24H Tlts Thresholds area. 24H Tlts alarms threshold:
• Tlts 1 (sec.), Tlts 2 (sec.), Tlts 3 (sec.), Tlts 4 (sec.). Threshold levels (expressed as num-
ber of seconds, within a 24 hour period, when the transmitted power is higher than the
TLT1, TLT2, TLT3, TLT4 threshold levels) over which the system activates the relevant
alarms.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default
0), press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold
and accordingly of the alarm.
• Tlt Thresholds area. Threshold levels of the transmitted power:
• Tlt 1 (dBm), Tlt 2 (dBm), Tlt 3 (dBm), Tlt 4 (dBm). Respectively the first, the second, the
third and the fourth threshold level of the transmitted power.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between -40dBm and 35dBm,
press Apply and confirm.
Press to compress an area. Press to expand the area.

If ACM > Radio 1A measure is selected, the Commons window displays the following parameters:
• 15M Thresholds area. Alarms threshold:
• 15M <modulation> Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 15
minute period, when the counter <modulation> has increased - over which it is activated
the alarm.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 900 (default 0), press
Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accordingly of
the alarm.
• 24H Thresholds area. Alarms threshold:
• 24H <modulation> Threshold. Threshold - expressed as number of seconds, within a 24
hour period, when the counter <modulation> has increased - over which it is activated
the alarm.
To change a threshold, set into the relevant box, a number between 1 and 86400 (default 0),
press Apply and confirm. The value 0 represents the deactivation of the threshold and accord-
ingly of the alarm.
<modulation> = BPSK, 4QAMS, 4QAM, 16QAM or 64QAM.
Press to compress an area. Press to expand the area.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 43


Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING This operation stops the measure ACM Radio, if active.

1. Select Main > Performance Monitoring.

2. Press Open new performance window.

3. Select the ACM > Radio 1A.

4. Press Commons.
The Policy parameter indicates the modality used to increase the counters.
5. To change the parameter, select the option:
• Active Mod. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is equal to the currently active one,
are increased.
• No Avail.Mod. Each second the counters, whose ACM profile is higher than the current one and
lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Profile), are increased.

6. Press Apply and confirm.

44 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Performance Monitoring contextual area

The contextual area manage the PM measures.

Push-button
Open new performance window. Open the Performances window which allows:
Manage the PM measures (activation, deactivation, threshold setting).
Display the activation status of the PM measures
Display the results of the measures in graphic and table format.
Display the status of the threshold exceeding alarms.
It is possible to open more Performances... window pressing again Open new performance
window or pressing Open New Window present in the Performances.... window itself.

See also
Performance Monitoring (command)
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure
Activate one or more PM measures
Deactivate one or more PM measures
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures
Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
PM measures available
PM measures (info)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 45


Performances window

Tab.1 displays the elements of the Performances window.

Tab.1 Performances window

3 4 6

(1) Title bar. When the window is opened, the title bar displays Performances [none selected].
When you select an option which allows displaying the results of a measure ( see note 3), Perfor-
mances [Selected group / Selected measure / Selected measurement unit] will be displayed, for
example Performances [G828 / Radio 1A / seconds].
Push-button

. Compress the window.

. Expand the window.

. Expand the window to the size of the Browser page.

. Restore the original size of the window.

. Close the window.

(2) Push-buttons bar:


Start. Activate one or more PM measures.
Stop. Deactivate one or more PM measures.
Clear Alarms. Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures.
Clear Counters. Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures
stored into the equipment and displayed into the window.
Refresh. Update the data.
Commons. Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure. Push-
button meaningful only if one group is selected.
Open New Window. Open a new Performances window.

46 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Help. Open the help on-line.

The push-buttons Start, Stop, Clear Alarms and Clear Counters, if a group is selected, execute
their action for all the measures present in the group. Otherwise, if one measure or one option below
the measure is selected, they execute their action only for the selected measure.

(3) List of the PM measures. The measures are subdivided in groups.


Selecting a group, the list of the measures associated to the group can be expanded.
Selecting one measure, the options pointing out the measurement units of the parameters associ-
ated to the measure are displayed. This subdivision is necessary because it is not possible to graph-
ically represent the results of the control parameters by means of different measurement units.
Selecting one measurement unit in the right part of the window (see note 4), the result of the con-
trol parameters and the threshold exceeding alarms are displayed. If the measure has never been
activated, the graph and the table will be empty.

The symbol:
identifies an expanded group or measure.
identifies a compressed group or measure.
identifies a measuring unit.

To every measure, the status is displayed:


(Stop.). The measure is not on progress.
(Run.). The measure is on progress.

The group and the relevant measures (group > measure) available are the following:
G828 > Radio 1A, checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following measuring units:
• seconds. Seconds: ES, SES, SEP, UAS.
• blocks. Blocks: BBE.
RxPwr > Radio 1A, checks the power of the signal at reception.
The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following measuring units:
• Rlts. Seconds: Rlts1, Rlts2, Rlts3, Rlts4, Rlts5.
• TM. dBm: TMMax, TMMin, Average Lev.
TxPwr > Radio 1A, checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following measuring units:
• Tlts. Seconds: Tlts1, Tlts2, Tlts3, Tlts4.
• TM. dBm: TMMax, TMMin, Average Lev.
ACM > Radio 1A, traces the trend of the ACM profiles in the time.
The results of the control parameters are shown subdivided into the following counters:
• seconds. Counters relevant to the ACM profiles.
• UpDownShift. Counters DownShift and UpShift.

Press to hide the list of measures. Press to display the list again.

(4) Graphical representation of the measure results. This area displays, in graphical format, the
results of the control parameters of the selected measure/measurement unit.
Every bar represents the result of the measure of one parameter in a given observation period (daily
or primary record).
The position of the bar on the x-axis indicates the daily or primary record which it is referred to:
• C.D. Current daily record (24 hours). The X100 suffix indicates that the value must be mul-
tiplied by 100 to obtain the real measured value.
• L. D. Preceding daily record. The displayed value must be multiplied by 100 to obtain the
real measured value.
• Curr. 15 Min. Current primary record (15 minutes).
• 15 Min. ÷ 4 Hours. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).

Moreover, for every record the relevant status is displayed: (ML), (MF), (IN), (LO), (RE). The de-
scription of every single status is reported in the following note. If the status indication is not pre-
sent, the record is not available, because the measure was not active during the considered
observation period.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 47


The colour of the bar indicates the control parameter that corresponds to the value. The key of the
parameters and their colours is always pointed out above the graph. The displayed control param-
eters changes according to the selected measure/measuring unit (see note 3).

The position on the y-axis indicates the value achieved by the parameter during the specific obser-
vation period (record). The measurement unit on the y-axis changes depending on the type of pa-
rameter represented in the graph. Moreover the y-scale dynamically changes depending on the
entity of the represented values.
The results relevant to a given parameter can be hidden selecting the parameter label located in
the top part of the area (for example ). To display the parameter results again, select the
label again.

(5) Table representation of the measure results. This area displays, in table format, the results of
the control parameters of the selected measure/measurement unit.
For every parameter, the result of the measure is pointed out relevant to a given observation period
(daily or primary record):
• Type. According to the selected measure this field indicates:
• G828 Radio, RxPwr Radio and TxPwr Radio measures: Control parameters (see
PM measures available).
• ACM Radio measure: Counters. One counter is foreseen for every ACM profile (see
PM measures available).
For every counter, the column of the specific observation period indicates (expressed
in seconds) the number of times the counter is increased. The rule used to increased
a counter changes according to the currently active modality (see Policy parameter).
Besides one counter per modulation, the following counters are foreseen:
• DownShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile lower than the previous one.
• UpShift. Number of times the profile, during the specific observation period,
has changed assuming a profile higher than the previous one.
Into the table, the system does not point out the results relevant to all the counters. Such
results have been subdivided according to the selected measure/measuring unit (see note
3).
• Curr. Day. Current daily record (24 hours).
• Last Day. Preceding daily record.
• Curr. 15 Min. Current primary record (15 minutes).
• 15 Min. ÷ 4 Hours. 16 preceding primary records (each record is of 15 minutes).

What just said is valid from the second row of the table on, because the first row indicates the status
of the records (Count. Status):
• Meaningless (ML) (green). The record has been completely acquired and the measure is not
affected by errors.
• Meaningful (MF) (green). The record has been completely acquired and it detected some per-
formance errors.
If one or more alarms are active (see note 6) means that the counter(s) have exceeded their
threshold value.
• Incomplete (IN) (yellow). The record has not been completely acquired during the corre-
sponding observation period.
The measure starting record is always in this status. The daily record gets this status also
when only one primary record of the corresponding day is in incomplete status.
The daily record of the current date will be always an incomplete one because the daily re-
cords are acquired at 23.59 of each day.
• Lost (LO) (red). The record has not reached the main controller of the equipment for instance
because the corresponding peripheral card has been physically extracted before it could have
forwarded the record itself or for generic hardware/software troubles.
• Restarted (RE) (red). The record has been lost after a reset of the equipment.
When the equipment has a software restart and checks that the measure is activated for a
certain measure point, all the record coupled with such a measure point will result in this
status.
• ---. The record is not an available one because, during the observation period under exam-
ination, the measure was not activated.

48 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


(6) Status of the threshold exceeding alarms and configuration parameters. These fields change
according to the selected measure:

G828 Radio measures


• 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
• 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
• UAS. Unavailability alarm.

RxPwr Radio measure


• 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
• 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
• Rlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the received power actually set. These parameters can
be configured by the user.

TxPwr Radio measure


• 15M <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the primary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
• 24H <control parameter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific control parameter
into one of the daily observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
• Tlt Thresh. Threshold levels of the transmitted power actually set. These parameters
can be configured by the user.

ACM Radio measure


• 15M <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the pri-
mary observation periods (15 minutes) present into the window.
• 24H <counter>. Threshold exceeding alarm of the specific counter into one of the daily
observation periods (24 hours) present into the window.
• Policy. Modality used to increase the counters:
• Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile
is equal to the one currently active.
• Not Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM
profile is higher than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper mod-
ulation threshold (Upper Profile).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 64 QAM has been defined as Upper Profile and the
current modulation is 4 QAM. If the active modality is:
• Active Mod, each second only the counter 4QAM is increased.
• Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 16QAM, 64QAM are increased.

The colour of the alarm boxes represents the alarm status and severity:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Critical,
Major, Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.
• Grey. Alarm deactivated.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 49


PM measures available

G828 > Radio 1A


RxPwr > Radio 1A
TxPwr > Radio 1A
ACM > Radio 1A

G828 > Radio 1A

The Radio 1A measure (G828 group) checks the quality of the received signal at radio side.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
BBE (Background Block Error). Number of blocks where it has been detected at least one er-
rored bit not belonging to SES.
ES (Errored Second). The second when there have been one or more errored blocks.
SES (Severely Errored Second). The second when there have been a percentage of errored
blocks > 30% or the second when it has been activated an alarm equivalent to the interruption
of the signal at reception.
SEP (Severely Errored Period). Number of periods with a number of consecutive SES comprised
between 3 and 9. The sequence is ended by a second without SES.
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds). Number of unavailability seconds. The counting of the seconds
starts after P consecutive seconds with SES presence and it ends at the beginning of a period of
Q consecutive seconds without SES. The P seconds are counted into the unavailability period.
The Q and P values can be configured.
The parameters are implemented according to G.828 ITU-T Rec.

RxPwr > Radio 1A

The Radio 1A measure (RxPwr group) checks the power of the signal at reception.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at reception (RL) during the ob-
servation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at reception (RL) during the observation period (15
min or 24 hours).
Rlts (Received Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at reception (RL - Received Level) is lower than the pre-defined threshold
level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 5 threshold levels.

The parameters are implemented according to Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

TxPwr > Radio 1A

The Radio 1A measure (TxPwr group) checks the power of the signal at transmission.
The check consists of measuring the following quality parameters:
TMMax (Tide Mark Max). Maximum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
TMMin (Tide Mark Min). Minimum value reached by the power at transmission (TL) during the
observation period (15 min or 24 hours).
Average Level. Average level of the power at transmission (TL) during the observation period
(15 min or 24 hours)

50 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Tlts (Transmitted Level Threshold Second). Number of seconds where it has been detected that
the value of the power at transmission (TL - Transmitted Level) is higher than the pre-defined
threshold level. It is possible to define up to a maximum of 4 threshold levels.

The parameters are implemented according to Standard EN 301 129 of the ETSI.

ACM > Radio 1A

WARNING Measure available and meaningful if the adaptive modulation is active.

The Radio 1A measure (ACM group) traces the trend of the ACM profiles (receiver) in the time.
The trend is traced using one counter for each ACM profile and further counters (UpShift and DownShift):
BPSK. Counter relevant to the ACM profile BPSK. The rule used to increase the counter changes
according to the active increase mode*.
4QAM Str. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM Str. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
4QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 4QAM. The rule used to increase the counter chang-
es according to the active increase mode*.
16QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 16QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
64QAM. Counter relevant to the ACM profile 64QAM. The rule used to increase the counter
changes according to the active increase mode*.
DownShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has
changed assuming an ACM profile lower than the previous one.
UpShift. Number of times the ACM profile, during the specific observation period, has changed
assuming an ACM profile higher than the previous one.
* The counters relevant to the ACM profiles can be increased according to the following modes:
• Active Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is equal to
the one currently active.
• No Avail. Mod. The counter is increased each second if the corresponding ACM profile is higher
than the current one and lower than or equal to the upper modulation threshold (Upper Profile).
Example. Suppose the ACM profile 64 QAM has been defined as Upper Profile and the current modulation
is 16 QAM. If the active modality is:
• Active Mod, each second only the counter 4QAM is increased.
• Not Avail. Mod, each second the counters 16QAM, 64QAM are increased.
The mode used to increase the counters of the ACM profiles is common to all the counters and must be
selected by the user.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 51


PM measures (info)

A PM measure consists of recording, during a pre-defined time range (observation period), the values of
specific parameters.
Some threshold limits have been assigned to such control parameters (the setting of the thresholds can
be changed).
The exceeding of the threshold limit indicates a more or less serious degradation of the signal. This condi-
tion generates an alarm.
The alarms relevant to the threshold exceeding are treated by the equipment and by the application as
normal alarms. The only exception is that the alarm is not automatically reset at the return into the thresh-
old limit but the user has to execute the reset of this kind of alarms.
The control parameters under examination change according to the equipment type and to the measure
type supported by that type of equipment. Usually, all the executed measures refer to ITU-T Recommen-
dations (eg. G.828, etc.).

The activation (and the deactivation) of the PM measures can be executed by the user.
When it has been activated a PM measure, the equipment starts the storing of the values relevant to the
control parameters.
The results of the measures are sub-divided into records. Each record contains the values recorded into a
specific time range (observation period).
If at the end of the observation period, the measure has not yet been deactivated the system starts another
observation period and so on until when the operator stops the measure.
The equipment group the results of the PM measures into observation period of 15 minutes (primary re-
cords) and of 24 hours (daily records).

The observation periods can not be synchronized with the instant when the measure is activated but such
records refer, for the primary records, to the quarter of an hour (00.00, 00.15, 00.30, etc.) and, for the
daily records, to the time 00.00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated).
For instance, if a measure starts at 11.40, the first primary record will have as observation period the time
11.4011.45 (corresponding to the time range 11.3011.45), while the first daily record will have as ob-
servation period 11.4000.00.

When the user requires the display of the results of the PM measures, the daily and primary records rele-
vant to the running PM measures are displayed in the WEB LCT page of the equipment.

For each type of measure, the equipment keeps stored the current records and also the last 16 primary
records (corresponding to the last 4 hours) and the last daily one (corresponding to the preceding day).
The preceding records are overwritten.
When the operator stops a measure, the system stores the uncompleted current record.

If the operator activates and deactivates the measure more times during the same observation period, the
system will store the record that contains the results of the last executed measure.
For instance if the measure has been activated at 9.02 and deactivated at 9.07, then it has been newly
activated at 9.09, the record relevant to the observation period 9.009.15 will contain the results of the
measures relevant to the period 9.099.15, while the ones relevant to the period 9.029.07 will not be
stored.

If equipment has some PM measures on progress and it is re-started up or turned off, when it will succes-
sively restarted or turned on the measures activated before the turning off will be automatically re-started.
The records (primary and daily), relevant to the period when measure has been stopped, will result empty
and when it has been reached the limit of 16 primary records and 1 daily one, they will overwrite the pre-
ceding records.

See also
Performance Monitoring (command)
Performance Monitoring contextual area
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure
Activate one or more PM measures
Deactivate one or more PM measures
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures

52 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio)
PM measures available
PM measures (info)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 53


Report & Logger
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Report & Logger command manages the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations ex-
ecuted by the users and the equipment configuration.
With log of the equipment alarms we mean the list of the status and alarm signals currently active on the
equipment (current alarms) and the signals memorized in the equipment controller (alarm history).
With log of the operations we mean the list of the operations executed by all the users who can connect to
the equipment. The list is stored in the equipment controller.

Operations
Save the log of the equipment alarms
Delete the log of the equipment alarms
Save the log of the operations executed by the users
Delete the log of the operations executed by the users
Save the equipment configuration

GUI
Report & Logger contextual area

See also
Alarms management (info)

Save the log of the equipment alarms

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger.


2. Press Alarm Log.
In the Alarm Log window are displayed:
• Equipment Info. General parameters:
• Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
• Equipment Type. Equipment type.
• Date. Date/time when it has been generated the report.
• Current Alarm Log and History Alarm Log. Respectively list of the current alarms and history
alarms. Every single record identifies an alarm with the following information:
• Severity. Alarm severity.
• Status. Alarm status.
• Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm respectively with the Warning, Minor, Ma-
jor or Critical severity.
• Status. Alarm status:
• On. Alarm active.
• Off. Alarm inactive (detected/cleared alarm). Meaningful only for alarm history.
• Date/Time. Detection or reset date and time of the alarm. The format of date/time
changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
• Description. Alphanumeric string that specify the type of the alarm.

3. Press Download Report.

4. Set the path and the name of the file where you want to save the log and press Save.
The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Alarm Log window.

54 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Delete the log of the equipment alarms

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger

2. Press Reset Alarm Logger and confirm.


A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

Save the log of the operations executed by the users

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger.

2. Press Command Log.


In the Command Log window are displayed:
• Equipment Info. General parameters:
• Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
• Equipment Type. Equipment type.
• Date. Date/time when it has been generated the report.
• Current Command Log. Operations list. Every record identifies an operation for which are re-
ported:
• Performer. Type of user who has performed the operation:
• web. User of WEB LCT application.
• snmp. User of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system (NMS5UX user).
• cli. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via serial line.
• remoteCli. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via telnet.
• Action. Action performed by the user.
• Instance. Name of the equipment instance to which the operation refers.
• Value Set. Set value.
• User. Name of the user who has executed the operation.
• Source address. IP address of the machine from which it has been executed the opera-
tion.
• Date/Time. Date and time when it has been executed the operation. The format of date/
time changes according to the setting made in the operating system.
The empty box indicates that the information is not available, because not meaningful for the relevant
type of operation.

3. Press Download Report.

4. Set the path and the name of the file where you want to save the log and press Save.
The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Command Log window.

Delete the log of the operations executed by the users

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger

2. Press Reset Command Logger and confirm.


A message indicates the end and the result of the operation.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 55


Save the equipment configuration

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Report & Logger.

2. Press Inventory Report.


In the Inventory Report window are displayed:
• Equip Info. General parameters:
• Equipment ID. Equipment identifier.
• Equipment Type. Equipment type.
• Date. Date/time when it has been generated the report.
• HW Inventory, SW Inventory, SW list, etc. Equipment parameters.
The whole equipment parameters are subdivided in groups.
The format of the parameters present in each group is self-explicative and changes according
to the type of represented data.

3. Press Download Report.


4. Set the path and the name of the file where you want to save the log and press Save.
The format, used to save the data to file, is the same displayed in the Inventory Report window.

56 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Report & Logger contextual area

The contextual area allows to save the log of the equipment alarms, the log of the operations executed by
the users and the equipment configuration.

Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Reset Alarm Logger. Delete the log of the equipment alarms


Reset Command Logger. Delete the log of the operations executed by the users
Alarm Log. Save the log of the equipment alarms
Command Log. Save the log of the operations executed by the users
Inventory Report. Save the equipment configuration

See also
Report & Logger (command)
Alarms management (info)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 57


NMS Wake Up Config.
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The NMS Wake Up Config. command manages the Wake Up trap (Wake Up functionality).

Operations
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality

GUI
NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area

See also
Wake Up functionality (info)

Verify the Wake Up functionality status

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > NMS Wake Up Config.


The NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area displays the sending status of the Wake Up trap and the
current setting of the relevant sending parameters.

Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The execution parameters (NMS IP Address, Timeout, etc.) cannot be modified when the Wake
Up functionality is already active. To modify them, it is necessary Disable the Wake Up functionality and
them modify them.

1. Select Main > NMS Wake Up Config.

2. Set the IP address of the server, which the Wake Up trap must be sent to, in the NMS IP Address box.

3. Set the time interval, for which the Wake Up trap is sent at the end of which it is automatically disabled,
in the Timeout (Minutes) box.
Typing or selecting the arrows of the box, set a number between 0 and 1440 minutes.
The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually disables it or the
NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
4. Set the physical location (for example, the name of the site) of the equipment in the NE Location box.
The setting of the parameter is optional.

5. Select the Enable option.


6. Press Apply and confirm.

Disable the Wake Up functionality

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > NMS Wake Up Config.

2. Select the Disable option or reset the value present in the NMS IP Address box (value 0.0.0.0).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

58 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area

The contextual area displays the configuration parameters of the Wake Up functionality.

Parameter
Status. Transmission status of Wake Up trap. The sending of the Wake Up trap is:
• Active, when the Enable option is selected and a valid value (different from 0.0.0.0)
is set as IP address of the server (option NMS IP Address).
• Inactive, when the Disable option is selected and the value 0.0.0.0 is set as IP ad-
dress of the server (option NMS IP Address).

NMS IP Address. IP address of the server which the Wake Up trap must be sent to. With server
we mean the machine where the supervision system NMS5UX-B or NMS5LX or a different man-
agement system, able to manage the reception of the Wake Up trap, is installed.

Timeout (Minutes). Time interval for which the Wake Up trap, when enabled, is sent to the
server. The setting of the value 0 indicates that the trap is sent until when the user manually
disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.

NE Location. Optional parameter. The user can insert the physical location (for example the
name of the site) of the equipment in this field. This information is communicated to the remote
manager together with the characteristics of the equipment. The supervision system NMS5UX-
B or NMS5LX does not use this information.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
NMS Wake Up Config. (command)
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality
Wake Up functionality (info)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 59


Wake Up functionality (info)

The Wake Up functionality allows the user enabling the spontaneous forward, from the equipment to a re-
mote server, of a SNMP trap for the notification of the equipment commissioning (Wake Up trap).

Auto Discovery
This functionality has been implemented as help to the Auto Discovery modality available in the
supervision systems NMS5UX-B and NMS5LX.
The Auto Discovery mode has the purpose to point out new equipment in the network, not man-
aged by the supervision system yet. More information about the Auto Discovery modality is re-
ported in the relevant documentation.
This chapter shows only the management of the Wake Up trap by the equipment. The imple-
mentation of the Wake Up functionality is the following.

WEB LCT
Via WEB LCT application, it is possible:
• Define the IP address of the server where the supervision system, which the trap must
be sent to (NMS IP Address option) is installed.
• Define the time interval for which the trap must be sent, after which the sending of the
trap is automatically disabled (Timeout option).
If the value 0 is set for the Timeout option, the Wake Up trap will be sent until when the
user manually disables it or the NMS server automatically disables it when intercepts it.
• Activate and deactivate the sending of the trap.
To activate the Wake Up functionality, it is necessary to set a valid value (different from
0.0.0.0) as IP address of the server (NMS IP Address option) and select the Enable op-
tion.
To deactivate the functionality, it is necessary to select the Disable option or reset the
NMS IP Address option (value 0.0.0.0).

When the Wake Up functionality is activated, the equipment starts sending the Wake Up trap
every minute for the time interval defined by the user (Timeout option). For example, if the val-
ue 60 has been set as timeout, the trap is sent each 60 minutes. At the end of 60 minutes, the
sending of the trap is automatically disabled.
If, in the period when the sending of the trap is enabled, the supervision system intercepts the
Wake Up notification records the presence of the new equipment in its database and disables
the sending of the Wake Up trap by the equipment (trap switch-off).

See also
NMS Wake Up Config. (command)
NMS Wake Up Config. contextual area
Verify the Wake Up functionality status
Set the execution parameters and activate the Wake Up functionality
Disable the Wake Up functionality

60 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Software Info & Maint.
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Software Info & Maint. command manages the equipment software/firmware and the restore of the
default equipment settings.

Operations
Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment
Update the software/firmware of the equipment
Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller
Restore Factory Default of the equipment
Execute the equipment software reset

GUI
Software Info & Maint contextual area

See also
Equipment software/firmware (info)
Factory Default of the equipment (info)

Verify the software/firmware version of the equipment

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.


The Equipment Firmware tab shows version, status and composition of the equipment firmware and
the WEB LCT version present into the equipment.

Update the software/firmware of the equipment

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active. In the latter
case, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server
and the file for the update must be present into a sub-folder of the Shared Folder set during the configu-
ration of FTP Server (see FTP protocol (info).
The application automatically updates the software/firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not
present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value).
This operation cannot be executed when the update is already in progress (Download Status parameter -
Downloading value).
The software/firmware update procedure could change the equipment functions.
Download time approximately 8 min. on the LAN.

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.

2. Press Upgrade.

3. In the box Download file path, type the path/name of the file you wish to use for update.
The file must be on the local PC (PC where the browser used for the display of WEB LCT is running).
If you use the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..).
Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and
the filename of the Shared Folder).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 61


4. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server (if not differently set at the con-
figuration of FTP Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC).

5. Set the download type to be executed, selecting the option:


• Forced, if you are updating the software/firmware of main controller of the equipment.
• Only difference or not present / peripheral, if you are updating the software/firmware of periph-
eral units (FPGA file and/or application code).

6. Activate the Bench Switch? box, if at the end of the download, the system has automatically to execute
a switching of the memory bench in such a way to use the bench with the software/firmware that has
been updated.

7. Press Start and confirm.


Before executing the updating, the system executes a compatibility check between the file to be for-
warded to the equipment and the one present on the terminal.
The check consists of comparing the technology type of the equipment.
If the parameters are incompatible, the application does not executes the update: the wording Inter-
rupted is displayed in the Download Status box of the bench whose software/firmware you are updat-
ing.
If the parameters are compatible, the operation is started and the Download Status box of the bench
whose software/firmware you are updating dynamically updates the progress of the operation, which
requires some minutes:
• Downloading. The operation is running.
The Abort push-button, present in the Download Status box during the software/firmware up-
date, can be used to stop the operation. Its selection requires the confirmation.
During the updating, the system deletes the software/firmware present into the bench memory
and it updates the software/firmware of the equipment one component at a time.
If the operation is stopped, into the memory bench there will be only the already updated com-
ponents. In this case, the new version can result unusable because it is not an integral one (the
bench will be in Not Loaded status).
In this case, the controller keeps the minimum functions necessary to allow a new updating of
the software/firmware.
• Complete. The update operation is ended.
The Software Version box shows the new software/firmware version.

Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The operation is traffic affecting.


The time to switch the memory benches is approximately 90 seconds.
Memory benches cannot be switched during the software/firmware update (Download Status parameter -
Downloading value) and when the software/firmware of the equipment is not present on a bench (Bench
Status parameter - Not Loaded value).

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.

2. Press Bench Switch and confirm.


The equipment is restarted; on the reconnection, the bench in Running status is forced to Loaded status
and vice versa.

Restore Factory Default of the equipment

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING The operation, if executed on equipment subjected to the radio supervision, could cause the loss
of the link because the restore of the factory settings involves the re-channelling of the radios to the default
values.

62 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.

2. Select the Advanced tab.

3. Activate the Factory Default check-box.

4. Press Apply and confirm.


At the end of the operation, the message The new settings will be active after a software restart is dis-
played.

5. Press OK to close the window.


6. Press Restart and confirm.
The default configuration will be automatically applied at the equipment restart (see Factory Default of
the equipment (info).

Execute the equipment software reset

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING After the reset, all the values activated before the operation result as valid ones.
Operation is no traffic affecting.

1. Select Main > Software Info & Maint.

2. Select the Advanced tab.

3. Press Restart and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 63


Software Info & Maint contextual area

The contextual area displays the equipment software/firmware.

Tabs
Equipment Firmware tab. Version and status of the equipment software/firmware.
Advanced tab. Factory default.

Push-button
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Software Info & Maint. (command)

Equipment Firmware tab

The tab shows the version, the status and the composition of the equipment software/firmware.

Parameters
FIRST TABLE

The table displays the version and the status of the equipment software/firmware:
Software Version. File name and version of the equipment software/firmware respec-
tively present on the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column).
Bench Status. Functioning status of the memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2
(Bench 2 column):
• Running. It is on progress the software/firmware relevant to the subject mem-
ory bench.
• Loaded. The software/firmware is present into the bench but actually it is not
on progress (StandBy).
• Not Loaded. The software/firmware is not present into the memory bench.
Downloading Status. Status of the update operation of the software/firmware respec-
tively present on memory bench 1 (Bench 1 column) and 2 (Bench 2 column):
• ---. Update is not in progress.
• Downloading. It is on progress the updating relevant to the memory bench.
• Interrupted. The update has been interrupted.
• Complete. The update operation is ended.
SECOND TABLE

The table displays the list of the codes and of the FPGA files that compose the equipment soft-
ware/firmware. Every row corresponds to a software/firmware element for which is pointed out
in the column:
Unit. Name of the unit or of the equipment part where there is the controller (code) or
the programmable device (FPGA file).
Software. Name which usually identifies the type of component:
• FW_Boot. Boot code. This part of code can not be updated in fact it is not pro-
vided with a version of the memory benches.
• FW_appl. Application code.
• Conf, Prog, Init or FPGA Configuration file of the programmable devices.
• WEB LCT. WEB Local Craft Terminal application.
Actual Release. Version of the code or of the FPGA file present into the controller.
For some elements, the system shows the version and also the relevant identification
code composed by the letter E or N followed by a number (each number identifies a dif-
ferent code type).

64 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Release Bench 1. Software/firmware version present into the memory bench 1 of the
controller.
Release Bench 2. Software/firmware version present into the memory bench 2 of the
controller.

Push-button
Upgrade. Update the software/firmware of the equipment.
Bench Switch. Switch the functioning of the memory benches relevant to the controller.

See also
Equipment software/firmware (info)

Advanced tab

WARNING Tab available only to users with Administrator profile.

The tab displays the parameters to restore the factory default of the equipment.

Parameters
Factory default. Box to Restore Factory Default of the equipment.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.

See also
Factory Default of the equipment (info)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 65


Equipment software/firmware (info)

The software/firmware of the equipment is the assembly of all the firmware necessary for the management
of the entire equipment and WEB LCT application.

The software/firmware of the equipment is present into the main controller that is provided with two mem-
ory benches (bench) the first one on service and the other one in waiting status.

Each bench can contain one software/firmware version (also different from the other one) of the equip-
ment.

It is possible to update the software/firmware of the equipment, relevant to a memory bench, at a time.
The application automatically updates the software/firmware of the memory bench not on progress or not
present (Bench Status parameter - Loaded or Not Loaded value). Download time approximately 8 min. on
the LAN.

See also
Software Info & Maint. (command)
Software Info & Maint contextual area

66 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Factory Default of the equipment (info)

Through the WEB LCT application, the Factory Default settings of equipment can be restored (see Restore
Factory Default of the equipment).
At the restart or at the new switch-on of the equipment, the Factory Default configuration will be applied.
All the settings executed until then by the user will be deleted (for example, user list, remote equipment
list, etc.).
In order to login to the equipment, the default user must be used. Username: admin - Password: admin.
The communication ports of the equipment will be restored to the addresses pointed out in Tab.2.
These addresses differ depending on the type (High or Low) of ODU. The equipment keeps always in mem-
ory the type (High or Low) of the last connected ODU. If no ODU has never been connected to the IDU,
the addresses of ODU Low must be used. If an ODU of High type is connected to equipment configured
with ODU of Low type (and vice versa), the equipment automatically changes its own default addresses.

Tab.2 Factory Default

Parameter IP Address NetMask ODU

IP Address 172.20.254.14 255.255.0.0 Low


Agent IP Address
172.20.255.15 255.255.0.0 High

Default Gateway 255.255.255.255* - Low

255.255.255.255* - High

* Value equivalent to null.

See also
Software Info & Maint. (command)
Software Info & Maint contextual area

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 67


Backup/Restore Config.
User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

The Backup/Restore Config. command manages the backup/restore from file of the whole equipment
configuration.

Operations
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last oper-
ation of configuration restore (revert configuration)

GUI
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area

See also
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active. In the latter
case, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server
(see FTP protocol (info).

1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.

2. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server (if not differently set at the con-
figuration of FTP Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC).
Setting the address 0.0.0.0, the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which
has made the request.

3. Type, in the Backup file name box, the path where you wish to save the file and the name of the file
with bak extension.
It is possible to set a name already existing for the file in the chosen path. In this case, the data present
in the file will be overwritten.
If you use the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..).
Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and
the filename of the Shared Folder).

4. Press Backup and confirm.


A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
A message displays the result of the operation.

Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active. In the latter
case, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server
and the file with the configuration must be present into a sub-folder of the Shared Folder set during the
configuration of FTP Server (see FTP protocol (info).

68 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.

2. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server (if not differently set at the con-
figuration of FTP Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC).
Setting the address 0.0.0.0, the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which
has made the request.

3. Set, in the Restore file name box, the name of the file you wish to use to restore the configuration.
If you use the FTP Server activated at start-up of WLC, it is necessary to enter the full path (c:\..).
Otherwise, if you use own FTP Server, it is necessary to enter the partial path (only the sub-folder and
the filename of the Shared Folder).

4. If you wish to activate a previous software/firmware version (Release Downgrade procedure), it is nec-
essary to load on the equipment a configuration coherent with the previous software/firmware.
In order that the configuration is still compatible after the restore procedure, the option Bench switch
after restore has to be activated.

5. Press Restore and confirm.


A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
At the end of the operation, the equipment is automatically restarted.

Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the program WEB Lct Console or a FTP Server is active. In the latter
case, the credentials used to access to the WEB LCT page must be the same configured for the FTP Server
(see FTP protocol (info).

1. Select Main > Backup/Restore Config.


The Reverte parameter shows the date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program
before the last restore operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system.
The wording --- shows that the file is not available.
2. Set, in the FTP Server IP Addr. box, the IP address of the FTP Server (if not differently set at the con-
figuration of FTP Server, it corresponds to IP address of PC).
Setting the address 0.0.0.0, the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the manager which
has made the request.

3. Press Revert and confirm.


A window shows the progress of the operation.
To stop the operation, press Abort and confirm.
At the end of the operation, the equipment is automatically restarted.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 69


Backup/Restore Config. contextual area

The contextual area displays the parameters to save and restore the whole equipment configuration.

Parameters
Backup file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to save the whole equipment con-
figuration to.

Restore file name. Path and name of the file which you wish to use for the restore of the pre-
viously saved configuration.

Bench switch after restore. Activate this option if you wish to return to the previous software/
firmware version during the configuration restore (Release Downgrade procedure).

FTP Server IP Addr. IP address of the FTP Server used for the file transfer.
The address 0.0.0.0 indicates that the system automatically retrieves the IP address of the man-
ager which has made the request.

Reverte. Date/time of the backup file automatically created by the program before the last re-
store operation.
The format of date/time changes according to the setting made in one’s operating system. The
wording --- shows that the file is not available.

Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Backup. Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)


Restore. Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Reverte. Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the
last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration)

See also
Backup/Restore Config. (command)
Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

70 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Backup/restore of the equipment configuration (info)

Backup
The WEB LCT program allows save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration).
The saved file is in binary format and can be saved on PC or external support according to the
user needs.

Restore
In any moment, the user can restore the equipment configuration saved to file transferring the
data of the file to the same equipment (configuration restore).
Before restoring the configuration, the equipment saves its own current configuration and keeps
it available until the successive restore operation.

Restore - Release Downgrade


During the procedure of configuration restore, it is possible to return back to the previous soft-
ware/firmware version present on the memory bank in status Loaded at the moment of the
backup.
In this case, in order that the configuration is still compatible after the restore operation, it is
necessary to activate the option Bench switch after restore.

Revert
In any moment, the user can retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the
program before the last operation of configuration restore (revert configuration).
In this way, two backup versions will be always available for equipment: one executed by the
user and the other automatically executed by the program before the last restore operation.

See also
Backup/Restore Config. (command)
Backup/Restore Config. contextual area
Save the whole equipment configuration (backup configuration)
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (restore configuration)
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last oper-
ation of configuration restore (revert configuration)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 71


Alarm Severity Config.
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Alarm Severity Config. command manages the alarm transmission and their severity.

Operations
Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms
Enable/disable an alarm
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm
Change the severity of an alarm

GUI
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area

See also
Alarms management (info)

Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.


The Alarm Severity Config. contextual area displays the alarms configuration.

Enable/disable an alarm

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.

2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.
3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting:
• Disable, to disable the alarm.
• Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical to enable the alarm. Select the option relevant to the
severity to be assigned to the alarm

4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.

5. Press Apply and confirm.

Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING It is possible to change the forwarding status of the trap only if it has been enabled the alarm
(see Enable/disable an alarm).

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.

2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.

72 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


3. Set the Trap parameter, selecting:
• Enable, to enable the forwarding of the alarm trap to the management system.
• Disable, to disable the forwarding of the alarm trap to a possible management system external
to the equipment (for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).

4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.
5. Press Apply and confirm.

Change the severity of an alarm

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Alarm Severity Config.

2. Select the alarm and press Edit Alarm Config or double click on the alarm.

3. Set the Severity parameter, selecting the severity you wish to associate to the alarm: Status, Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
If the alarm was disabled (Disable option selected), the selection of a different option, besides modify-
ing the alarm severity, automatically enables it.

4. Press Ok.
The settings are reported in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area. The symbol [*] is displayed
next to the name of the changed alarm.

5. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 73


Alarm Severity Config. contextual area

The contextual area displays the alarms configuration.

Alarms are subdivided into groups.


When contextual area is opened, only the groups are displayed (Group/Alarm column).
To expand and compress the list of alarms associated to a group, select the symbol next to the name
of the group. Every selection of the symbol makes the list assumes the status complementary to the pre-
vious one (if compress it is expanded and vice versa).
When a group is expanded, for every alarm is displayed the characteristics.
The groups and the alarms change according to the equipment configuration.

Parameters
Group/Alarm. Alarm name.
A colour box is before the name, pointing out the alarm status and severity:
• White box with red X. Alarm disabled.
• Green box. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
• Light blue box. Alarm enabled with Warning severity.
• Yellow box. Alarm enabled with Minor severity.
• Orange box. Alarm enabled with Major severity.
• Red box. Alarm enabled with Critical severity.
The presence of an asterisk [*] between the box and the alarm name shows that at least one
characteristic of the alarm has been changed.

Severity. Enabling status of the alarm and, if it is enabled, the relevant severity:
• Disabled. Alarm disabled.
• Status. Alarm enabled with severity equivalent to a status signal.
• Warning, Minor, Major or Critical. Alarm enabled with severity respectively Warning,
Minor, Major or Critical.
• Not available in this SW version. Alarm not supported by the current firmware version
present into the equipment controller.

Trap Notification. Forwarding status of the trap:


• Enabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to the management system is enabled.
• Disabled. The transmission of the alarm trap to a possible external management sys-
tem is disabled (for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX).
• ---. Information not meaningful because the alarm is disabled.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Edit Alarm Config. Enable/disable an alarm, Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an
alarm or Change the severity of an alarm

See also
Alarm Severity Config. (command)
Alarms management (info)

74 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Alarms management (info)

The term alarm defines the fault signal generated by an error or malfunction of the equipment or of any
component that composes it.
The signals referring to any event that does not indicates a malfunction but a status change, an operation
in progress or an operating indication are defined status signals.
The term event defines every signal of status, detected alarm and cleared alarm.
A maximum of 500 events are recorded in the equipment controller. When this limit is exceeded, each new
event will overwrite the oldest event.

Displaying alarms
The list of the current alarms is indicates in the Equipment status area.

Enabling/disabling alarms
The equipment alarms can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according to the needs.
Disabling an alarm means that, on the detection of the alarm itself, this is not registered in the
equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management pro-
gram: as the alarm had never occurred.
On the contrary, enabling an alarm (default condition) means that, when the alarm is detected,
this is registered in the equipment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is ena-
bled (see next item), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in
the current alarms and the history alarms.
WARNING The enabling/disabling of the alarm is independent for each alarm and local to the
equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must be executed
for each alarm of each equipment.

Enabling/disabling traps
The trap is a message (in this case of detection or clearing of an alarm) spontaneously sent by
the equipment to a possible external management system, for example NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX.

The forwarding of the trap of each alarm can be disabled and re-enabled by the user according
to his own needs.

Disabling a trap means that, on the detection of the alarm, this is not registered in the equip-
ment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program.

On the contrary, enabling a trap (default condition) means that, on the detection of the alarm,
this is registered in the equipment controller and communicated to the management system,
which displays it in the current alarms and the history alarms.

WARNING The enabling/disabling of the forwarding of the trap is independent for each alarm
and local to the equipment which the operation is executed for. This means that the setting must
be executed for each alarm of each equipment.

Alarm severity
Each alarm acknowledged and managed by the local management program has an associated
severity which determinates the importance of the alarm.
This severity is not fixed, but can be changed by the user as he likes.

Alarms log
With log of the equipment alarms we mean the list of the status and alarm signals currently ac-
tive on the equipment (current alarms) and the signals memorized in the equipment controller
(alarm history).
WEB LCT allows to Save the log of the equipment alarms and to Delete the log of the equipment
alarms.

See also
Alarm Severity Config. (command)
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 75


Group/User Management

Groups. It manages the user groups.


Users. It manages the users (users list of the equipment).
Permanent Login. It manages the IP address of Permanent Login.
Logged Users. It manages the users connected to equipment.

76 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Groups

User Profile | Admin.

The Groups command manages the user groups of the equipment.

Operations
Verify the user groups
Add a user group
Modify a user group
Delete a user group

GUI
Groups contextual area

See also
Users management (info)

Verify the user groups

User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups.


The Groups contextual area displays the list of the user groups currently stored in the equipment.

Add a user group

User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups.

2. Press Add Group.


3. Into the Name box, type the group name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 4 up
to 31, the accepted and recognized characters are 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z).
The parameter is Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different groups present into the same list.
The parameter can not be changed later.

4. Set the profile you wish to assign to the user who will belong to the group in the Profile box:
• Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or
change the equipment configuration with no exception.
• Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or exe-
cute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the
user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those oper-
ations available only to the Admin. user.
• Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area and Radio BER contextual area.
• Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.
5. Define the protocols/interfaces available to the users associated to the group (Allowed Protocols pa-
rameter):
• HTTP. HyperText Transfer Protocol: protocol used to transfer hypertext pages on the WEB.
• SNMP. Simple Network Management Protocol: protocol which allows monitoring and controlling
the network devices.
If you activate this protocol, select the relevant version:

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 77


• SNMPv1. First version.
• SNMPv2c. Second version.
• FTP. File Transfer Protocol: protocol for the file transfer.
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened by the
users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.
At least one protocol must be activated.

6. Press OK and confirm.


The new group is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.

Modify a user group

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING The user group (parameter Name) cannot be modified.


A group with at least one associated user cannot be modified. First delete the users and then modify the
group.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups.

2. To modify the profile of the users associated to a group, select the relevant Profile box and then the
option:
• Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send commands or
change the equipment configuration with no exception.
• Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send commands or exe-
cute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following operations: modifying the
user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the logout of a user and all those oper-
ations available only to the Admin. user.
• Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only maintenance
operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area and Radio BER contextual area.
• Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.
The parameter of the last group with profile Administrator cannot be modified.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

3. To change the protocols/interfaces available to the users associated to a group, select the relevant box:
• CLI. Command Line Interface: used for the management of the equipment.
The active box ( ) indicates that the interface will be available for the WEB LCT session opened
by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the interface will not be available.
The parameter is read-only because the setting is automatically made by WEB LCT, according
to the profile defined during the group creation: only the users belonging to groups with profile
Admin have the functionality CLI enabled.
• HTTP. Protocol HTTP.
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened
by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.
• SNMP. SNMP protocol. Select the option:
• Disabled. Protocol SNMP disabled.
• SNMPv1. Protocol SNMPv1 enabled.
• SNMPv2c. Protocol SNMPv2c enabled.
• FTP. Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the file transfer based on TCP.
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened
by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.
At least one protocol must be active.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

78 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Delete a user group

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING A group with at least one associated user cannot be deleted. First delete the users and then the
group.
This operation is not available if the default group Admin is selected.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Groups.

2. Select the group.

3. Press Remove Group and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 79


Groups contextual area

The contextual area displays the list of the users groups of the equipment.

Parameters
Name. Group name

Profile. Profile of the users associated to the group:


• Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send
commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
• Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send com-
mands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the
logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.
• Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area and Ra-
dio BER contextual area.
• Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

CLI. Command Line Interface: used for the management of the equipment.
The active box ( ) indicates that the interface will be available for the WEB LCT session opened
by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the interface will not be available.
The parameter is read-only because the setting is automatically made by WEB LCT, according
to the profile defined during the group creation: only the users belonging to groups with profile
Admin have the functionality CLI enabled.

HTTP. Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol): protocol used to transfer hypertext pages
on the WEB.
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened
by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.

SNMP. Protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol): protocol which allows monitor-
ing and controlling the network devices. Option:
• Disabled. Protocol SNMP disabled.
• SNMPv1. First version.
• SNMPv2c. Second version.

FTP. Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol): protocol for the file transfer based on TCP.
The active box ( ) indicates that the protocol will be available for the WEB LCT session opened
by the users of the group; the inactive box indicates that the protocol will not be available.

Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Add Group. Add a user group.


Remove Group. Delete a user group.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.

See also
Groups (command)
Users management (info)

80 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


FTP protocol (info)

The equipment uses the FTP protocol for the file transfer (download/upload).
To manage the FTP protocol, as tool auxiliary to WEB LCT application, it is necessary to install and run one
of the following programs:
• Web Lct Console version 1.2.0 or later.
• Standard FTP Server (e.g., free FTP Server FileZilla).

Web Lct Console


When the program is started, the FTP server provided with the program itself is automatically
started.
The server does not perform any check on the credentials.
For the download operations, it is sufficient to enter the complete path where the file resides.
At start-up of WLC, if a FTP Server is already active, the FTP server available with the program
is not started. This condition is signalled by a message.

Server FTP standard


If you use your own FTP Server, it must be installed and configured if not already present on
the PC.
The configuration consists in defining the users and the path (Shared Folder) used later for the
file transfer.

USERS. For a correct management of the data transfer, the credential used to access to WEB LCT
page must be the same configured for the FTP Server.
For this reason, it is suggested to configure, for the FTP Server, the users present in the equip-
ment user list with whom the download/upload operations are executed.

PATH. Define the path of Shared Folder for the file transfer.
The path will be used to save the files in the upload operations and shall be the path (even par-
tial) where are present the files for the download operations.
It is suggested not to save the files in C:\, but to create a sub-folder and set it for the file saving
(e.g. C:\ftp or C:\backup). This allows saving the backup files without being Administrator users
(some Windows versions require to be Administrator user to save the file in C:\).

See also
Groups (command)
Groups contextual area

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 81


Users

User Profile | Admin.

The Users command manages the users (WEB and SNMP) of the equipment.

Operations
Verify the user list
Add a user
Modify a user
Delete a user

GUI
Users contextual area

See also
Users management (info)

Verify the user list

User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users.


The Users contextual area displays the list of the users (WEB and SNMP) currently stored in the equip-
ment.

Add a user

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING The parameters for the setting of the user name and of the relevant password are Case Sensi-
tive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase characters.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users.

2. Select Add User.

3. Into the User box, type the user name (alphanumeric string with a number of characters from 4 up to
31, the accepted and recognized characters are 0÷9, a÷z and A÷Z).
It is not possible to assign the same name to two different users present into the same list.
The parameter can not be changed later.

4. Press Change.

5. Into the New Password and Confirm New Password box, type the access code of the (alphanumeric
string with a number of characters from 4 up to 31, the accepted and recognized characters are 0÷9,
a÷z and A÷Z) and press OK.

6. Set the group, to which you wish to associate the user, in the Group box.
The user will inherit the group characteristics: profile and use of the protocols HTTP, SNMP and FTP.

7. In the Timeout box, set the timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. If you wish:
• The session of WEB LCT opened by the user (even if disconnected) is kept for an infinity period
(session timeout disabled), set the value 0.
• The session of WEB LCT opened by the user, if disconnected, is automatically terminated once
reached a specific time limit (session timeout disabled), set a value between 1 and 3600 sec.
(1h).

82 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

8. Press OK and confirm.


The new user is inserted in the list and communicated to the equipment.

Modify a user

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING The name (parameter User) and the group (parameter Group) associated to the user can NOT
be changed. To change them, it is necessary to delete the user and create him again with the wished char-
acteristics.
The fields for the setting of the password are Case Sensitive; pay attention to uppercase and lowercase
characters.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users.

2. Select the user and press Modify User or double click on the user.

3. Execute the changing.


The setting modes of the parameters are the same ones above pointed out into the par. Add a user.

4. Press OK and confirm.

Delete a user

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING The operation is not available if the selected user is the current user or the last user with Ad-
ministrator profile.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Users.

2. Select the user.


3. Press Remove User and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 83


Users contextual area

The contextual area displays the user list (WEB and SNMP) currently stored in the equipment.
Each table row corresponds to a user.

Parameters
User. User name.

Group. Group which the user is associated to.

Profile. User profile:


• Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send
commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
• Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send com-
mands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force the
logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.
• Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute only
maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area and Ra-
dio BER contextual area.
• Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.

Timeout. Timeout of WEB LCT session opened by the user:


• O. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if discon-
nected) will be kept for an infinity period of time.
• <number> Seconds. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user,
if disconnected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant WEB LCT page has been
closed but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Add User. Add a user.
Remove User. Delete a user
Modify User. Modify a user.

See also
Users (command)
Users management (info)

84 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Users management (info)

Users list
The user list is a list of the users who can connect and require to login to the equipment by the
WEB LCT application (WEB user) or the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX program (SNMP user).
If an user is not present in the list stored in the equipment controller, that user cannot connect
and/or login to the that equipment.

Users are subdivided into groups (for details, see successive paragraphs).
Before creating an user, it is necessary to create the group which the user must be associated
to. One group can contain more users, but one specific user can belong to only one group.
A maximum of 10 groups and 10 users can be created in the equipment user list.

At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group
and a default user are available. Then, through WEB LCT application, new users and groups can
be created, modified and deleted.
The management of the user list can be performed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX system.

Groups
The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which it is possible to define a profile
and the enabling to the use of FTP, HTTP and SNMP protocols.
The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is
associated to that group.
The characteristics of a group are:
• Name of the group. The name of the group must be unique within an user list.
The name of the group, once assigned, cannot be changed.
• Profile which will be automatically assigned to the users associated to the group:
• Administrator. The user with this profile can both verify the parameters and send
commands or change the equipment configuration with no exception.
• Read/Write. The user with this profile can as check the parameters as send com-
mands or execute changes to the equipment configuration except for the following
operations: modifying the user list, aligning the date/time of the equipment, force
the logout of a user and all those operations available only to the Admin. user.
• Maintenance. The user with this profile can check the parameters and execute
only maintenance operations (MAN OP) in the Manual Operations contextual area
and Radio BER contextual area.
• Read Only. The user with this profile can only check the parameters.
• Protocols which will be available to the users assigned to the group:
• Protocol HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol), used to transfer hypertext pages on
the WEB.
• Protocol SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol), which allows monitoring
and controlling the network device. The user can activate the use of the first ver-
sion (SNMPv1), the second version (SNMPv2c) of the protocol.
• Protocol FTP (File Transfer Protocol), for the file transfer based on TCP.
More options can be enabled at the same time.

At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default group
is available with the following characteristics:
Name: Admin.
Profile: Administrator.
Enabled protocols: HTTP, FTP and SNMP version 1.
The default group can be changed but not deleted.

Via WEB LCT application, the user can Verify the user groups and only one user with Adminis-
trator profile can Add a user group, Modify a user group or Delete a user group.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 85


Users
The users belonging to the list are organized in groups for which a profile and the enabling to
the use of the FTP, HTTP and SNMP protocols can be defined.
The profile and the authorization of a group will be automatically assigned to the user who is
associated to that group.
The characteristics of an user are:
• Name/Password. Name and access password, which allow the program recognizing the
user as authorized.
The same user can open more WEB LCT page relevant to different equipment.
The name of an user must be unique within an user list.
The name of an user, once assigned, cannot be changed.
• Group which the user is associated to and from which the user inherits the profile and
the enabling to the use of FTP, HTTP, SNMP protocols.
• Timeout of the WEB LCT session opened by the user. It is possible to:
• Disable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if disconnect-
ed) will be preserved for an indefinite period of time.
• Enable the timeout: the WEB LCT session opened by the user, if disconnected, will
be automatically terminated once the set time period is reached.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session for which the relevant
WEB LCT page has been closed, but the disconnection from the equipment has not
been performed (user logout).

At the first connection with the equipment or after a Factory Default operation, a default user
is available with the following characteristics:
User: admin
Password: admin
Group: Admin. (default group - see characteristics in previous paragraph).
Profile: Administrator.
Timeout: 300 sec.

WARNING At the first access, it is suggested to immediately change the password of the default
user in order to limit the risk of intrusion via this account.
The default user can be modified or deleted. The only condition is that there must be at least
one other user with Administrator profile in the user list.

Through WEB LCT application, the user can Verify the user list and, only an user with Adminis-
trator profile, Add a user, Modify a user or Delete a user.

NMS5UX user
If the equipment is managed even by NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system, it is necessary
to create the user used by the supervision system for the connection to the equipment.
This user must be associated to a group with profile Administrator and all the protocols enabled.
More information about the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system is reported in the relevant
documentation.

See also
Groups (command)
Users (command)
Groups contextual area
Users contextual area
FTP protocol (info)

86 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Permanent Login

User Profile | Admin.

The Permanent Login command manages the remote users who have the possibility to be connected to
the equipment (Permanent Login).
The remote user has the same characteristics of the NMS5UX user with the only exception that he does
not need for a login password.
A maximum of 2 remote users can be set.

Operations
Verify the IP address of Permanent Login
Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login

GUI
Permanent Login contextual area

See also
Users management (info)

Verify the IP address of Permanent Login

User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Permanent Login.


The Permanent Login contextual area displays the IP address of the remote users who have the possi-
bility to be connected to the equipment.

Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login

User Profile | Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Permanent Login.

2. To set/modify the IP address of the machine relevant the:


• First remote user, type a valid IP address in the Manager IP Address 1 box.
• Second remote user, type a valid IP address in the Manager IP Address 2 box.
Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 87


Permanent Login contextual area

The contextual area displays the IP address of the remote users who have the possibility to be connected
to the equipment (Permanent Login).

Parameters
Manager IP Address 1. IP address of the machine relevant the first remote user.

Manager IP Address 2. IP address of the machine relevant the second remote user.

Value 0.0.0.0 indicates the parameter is disabled.

Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Permanent Login (command)
Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login
Users management (info)

88 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Logged Users

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Logged Users command manages the users connected to the equipment.

Operations
Verify the users connected to the equipment
Force the logout of a user

GUI
Logged Users contextual area

See also
Users management (info)

Verify the users connected to the equipment

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Logged Users.


The Logged Users contextual area displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the
command is selected.
Press Refresh to update the data present in the window.

Force the logout of a user

User Profile | Admin.

WARNING Logging out oneself is not possible.

1. Select Main > Group/User Management > Logged Users.

2. Select the wished user.

3. Press Force Logout and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 89


Logged Users contextual area

The contextual area displays the list of the users connected to the equipment when the command is se-
lected.
Each row of the table corresponds to an user.

Parameters
User. User name.
The wording NMS5UX shows the user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervisory system or a remote
user who has the possibility to be connected to the equipment (Permanent Login).

Profile. User profile (see User Profile parameter).

Timeout. Timeout of the WEB LCT session:


• 0 s. Session timeout disabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user (even if discon-
nected) will be kept for an infinity period of time.
• <number> s. Session timeout enabled. WEB LCT session opened by the user, if dis-
connected, will be automatically ended once reached the set time limit.
With disconnected session we mean a WEB LCT session whose relevant page has been closed
but for which the disconnection from the equipment has not been executed (user logout).

Login Type. User type:


• WEB. User of the WEB LCT application.
• SNMP. SNMP user or user of the NMS5UX-B/NMS5LX supervision system.
• CLI. User of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via telnet or serial line.

IP Address. Machine IP address.


With the wording machine, it is intended the PC/server/workstation on which the application
used by the user is actually running.
Parameter not meaningful for the user of SM-OS application, connected to the equipment via
serial line.

Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Force Logout. Force the logout of a user
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Logged Users (command)
Users management (info)

90 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


EQUIPMENT

BW & Mod./Link ID. It manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation
and link identification number.
General Preset. It manages the modem and radio parameters.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 91


BW & Mod./Link ID
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The BW & Mod./Link ID command manages the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive
modulation and link identification number.

Operations
Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation
Modify the reference band
Modify the reference modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Verify/modify the link identification number

GUI
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area

See also
Adaptive modulation (info)

Verify the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration
parameters of the adaptive modulation

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.


The Modulation & Capacity tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the
configuration parameters of the adaptive modulation.

Modify the reference band

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.


The Bandwidth parameter indicates the current reference band.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.

3. Press Apply and confirm.


The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled
(see Equipment Features tab).

Modify the reference modulation

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.


The Reference Modulation parameter indicates the current reference modulation.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

92 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Upgrade up to... functionality is not enabled
(see Equipment Features tab).

Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.


The ACM Engine parameter indicates the operating status of the adaptive modulation.

2. To change the parameter, select the option:


• Disabled. Adaptive modulation disabled.
• Enabled. Adaptive modulation enabled.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.


The Upper Profile and Lower Profile parameters respectively indicates the upper threshold and the lower
threshold of the ACM profile (code and modulation).

2. To change the parameters Upper Profile and Lower Profile, select the value relevant to the wished mod-
ulation.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the link identification number

User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > BW & Mod./Link ID.

2. Select the Local Link ID tab.


The Local Link ID parameter indicates the link identification number.

3. To change the parameter, type the new value in the box (value between 1 and 255).
Set the value 0 to not use the link identifier.

4. Press Apply and confirm.


The setting so executed does NOT automatically modify also the identification number of the remote
equipment.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 93


BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area

The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to modulation/capacity, adaptive modulation and link
identification number.

Tabs
Modulation & Capacity tab. Reference band/modulation, operating status and configuration of
the adaptive modulation.
Local Link ID tab. Link identification number.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
BW & Mod./Link ID (command)

Modulation & Capacity tab

The tab displays the reference band/modulation, the operating status and the configuration parameters of
the adaptive modulation.

Parameters
ACM ENGINE CONFIGURATION
ACM Engine. Operating status of the adaptive modulation:
• Enabled. The adaptive modulation is enabled.
• Disabled. The adaptive modulation is disabled.
Lower Profile / Upper Profile. Respectively upper and lower thresholds of the ACM
profile (code and modulation). The available profiles depends on the setting of the pa-
rameter Profile Management.
Parameter available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.
Bandwidth. Radio channelling.
Reference Modulation. Modulation.

ACM TABLE
This table shows, for each ACM level, the capacity used by Ethernet tributaries. Depend-
ing on the operating status of the adaptive modulation, one or more profile will be avail-
able. If the adaptive modulation is:
• Disabled. The table contains only the ACM profile relevant to the reference
modulation (Bandwidth & Modulation).
• Enabled. The table contains all the ACM profiles. Among these, the profile in-
cluded between the minimum and the maximum modulation are available.
Active Modulation (ACM Table). Available modulations: BPSK and 4QAM Strong (mod-
ulations with low rate FEC), 4QAM, 16QAM and 64QAM.
Ethernet Capacity (ACM Table). Capacity used by the Ethernet tributaries.

WARNING When the contextual area is opened, the values present in the tab refer to the currently selected
reference band/modulation.
If the currently selected reference band/modulation is modified, some parameters are disabled.
In order to display the parameters relevant to the new selected band, it is necessary to confirm (push-
button Apply) the new reference band/modulation.

94 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


See also
Modify the reference band
Modify the reference modulation
Modify the operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify the lower threshold and the upper threshold of the modulation (ACM enabled)
Adaptive modulation (info)

Local Link ID tab

The tab displays the link identification number.

Parameters
Local Link ID. Link identification number.
Set the value 0 to not use the link identifier.

See also
Verify/modify the link identification number

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 95


Adaptive modulation (info)

Ethernet transport
ALFOplus80HD assigns all the available traffic capacity to Ethernet interface.

Multiple ACM profiles per modulation


When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected refer-
ence modulation (i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be au-
tomatically selected (i.e.: 4 QAM).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected lower
modulation (i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the minimum throughput profile will be automati-
cally included (i.e.: 4 QAM strong).
When more than one ACM profile (different FEC redundancy) is available at the selected upper
modulation (i.e.: 4 QAM and 4 QAM strong), the maximum throughput profile will be automat-
ically included (i.e.: 4 QAM).

See also
BW & Mod./Link ID (command)
BW & Mod./Link ID contextual area

96 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


General Preset
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The General Preset command manages the modem and radio parameters.

Operations
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio branch label

GUI
General Preset contextual area

Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception

User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.


The Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the threshold level of
the signal at reception. Under this threshold level, it is activated the relevant alarm.

2. To change the parameter, move the cursor to the wished level.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the radio branch label

User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Equipment > General Preset.


The Radio Branch Label parameter indicates the label that identifies the radio branch.

2. To change the parameter, type the new label (alphanumeric string with maximum 30 characters).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 97


General Preset contextual area

The contextual area displays the modem and radio parameters.

Parameters
Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the signal at recep-
tion.

Radio Branch Label. Label that identifies the radio branch.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
General Preset (command)
Verify/modify the threshold level of the signal at reception
Verify/modify the radio branch label

98 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


BASE BAND

Ethernet. It manages the Ethernet Switch main configuration: port physical Layer, layer 2 forwarding,
VLAN settings and interface statistics.
DCN. It manages the configuration of equipment management parameters: IP addressing and Routing
Table.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 99


Ethernet

Bridge Mode Conf.. It manages the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch.
Port Manager. It manages the ports configuration (traffic and auxiliary) of the Switch.
VLAN. It manages the virtual LAN (VLAN) configuration.
Prov. Bridge-VLAN. It manages the parameters relevant to VLAN’s when the Switch is in Provider Edge
Bridge modality.
Prov. Bridge-EtherType. It manages the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports.
LLF. It configures the operation of LLF functionality for the equipment.
Queue Depth. It manages the depth of the output queues.
Statistics. It displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/
bytes in input/output. The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC
1284 (Ethernet-like Statistics group).

100 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Bridge Mode Conf.

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Bridge Mode Conf. command manages the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet
Switch.

Operations
Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch
Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch

GUI
Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area

Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Bridge Mode Conf.


The Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area displays the current Bridge mode the Switch.

Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The operation involves the equipment restart.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Bridge Mode Conf.

2. In the Bridge Mode box, select the option:


• Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN. The port of type Customer Bridge
is supported.
This mode is supported for compatibility with the networks that do not manage the Service Tag
(S_Tag). Moreover, in this mode, the transport on the radio link is more efficient, because a dou-
ble Tag is not added.
• Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q (system composed by a single S-VLAN
component, actuated in compliance with clause 5 of IEEE Standard 802.1Q). The ports of type
Provider Network is supported.
• Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with a S-VLAN component
and, at least, one C-VLAN component. The ports of type Provider Network, Customer Network
and Customer Edge are supported.
In Provider Bridge and Provider Edge Bridge modalities, the Ethernet Service model is used to describe
the traffic packets according to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 10.2 and MEF 6.1).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 101


Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area

The contextual area displays the Bridge mode (according to IEEE 802.1ad) of the Ethernet Switch.

Parameters
Bridge Mode. Operating modality of the Ethernet Switch:
• Customer Bridge. The Switch is in Customer Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge 802.1Q VLAN. The port of type Cus-
tomer Bridge is supported.
• Provider Bridge (802.1ad). The Switch is in Provider Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as a Bridge Q-in-Q (system composed by a single
S-VLAN component, actuated in compliance with clause 5 of IEEE Standard 802.1Q).
The ports of type Provider Network and is supported.
• Provider Edge Bridge. The Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge mode.
In this mode, the Switch operates as Provider Edge Bridge 802.1ad with a S-VLAN
component and, at least, one C-VLAN component. The ports of type Provider Net-
work, Customer Network and Customer Edge are supported.

In Provider Bridge and Provider Edge Bridge modalities, the Ethernet Service model is used to
describe the traffic packets according to the requirements of Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF 10.2
and MEF 6.1).

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Bridge Mode Conf. (command)
Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch

102 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Port Manager

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Port Manager command manages the configuration of the Switch (traffic and auxiliary) ports.

Operations
Verify the Ethernet ports configuration
Modify the enabling status of a port
Activate the loop on line side of a port
Deactivate the loop on line side of a port
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port
Modify the transmission speed of a port
Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port
Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports
Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port
Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports
Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports
Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending on
its priority (User Priority)
Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management

GUI
Port Manager contextual area

Verify the Ethernet ports configuration

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.


The Port Manager contextual area displays the configuration of the Ethernet ports (traffic and auxiliary).

Modify the enabling status of a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. In the Admin State box, select the option:


• Down. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.
• Up. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work (Link Status -
Down).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 103


Activate the loop on line side of a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).


Before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set. If the
timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of
the equipment or the equipment reset.
Operation available only if the port is enabled to use (Admin State - Up).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. Set the Loopback value in the Admin State box relevant the wished port.

3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.

4. Confirm the operation.


The activation of the loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Deactivate the loop on line side of a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. Set the Up or Down value in the Admin State box relevant the wished port.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only for the line ports of the Switch.
Remember that a peer-to-peer connection works correctly if the two peers have set the same modality for
the autonegotiation management.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. In the Auto Neg. box relevant the wished port, set the box:
• Active ( ). The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the
peer at the other end of the link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonego-
tiation, the Full Duplex without flow control is proposed by default.
The port with optical interface can negotiate only the transmission speed 1Gb.
• Inactive ( ). The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured
in the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed of a port), the flow control configured in
the Data Flow tab, while the operation modality is Full Duplex.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is enabled (Auto Neg. - ).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. In the Auto Neg. box relevant the wished port, press Restart and confirm.

104 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Modify the transmission speed of a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only for the line ports with electrical interface and autonegotiation disabled
(Auto Neg. - ).
The transmission speed of the data through the port with optical interface is always 1 Gbit/s.
If the autonegotiation is enabled, the speed is automatically configured according to the hardware after
the negotiation with the peer at the other end of the connection.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. In the Speed box relevant the wished port, select the option:
• 100 Mb. he data transmission speed through the port is 100 Mbit/s.
• 10 Mb. The data transmission speed through the port is 10 Mbit/s.
• 1 Gb. The data transmission speed through the port is 1 Gbit/s.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only for line ports with electrical interface and disabled (Admin State -
Down).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. In the MDI/MDIX box relevant the wished port, select the option:
• MDI. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card modality).
• MDIX. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
• Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only for the disabled ports (Admin State - Down).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. In the MTU box relevant the wished port, set a number between 46 and 12266.
The value must correspond to the maximum dimension (in byte) of the data field accepted by the in-
terface without the heading bytes Ethernet and CRC.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the current Bridge modality of the Switch is Provider Edge Bridge (see
Bridge Mode Conf. contextual area).
In Customer Bridge modality the port is always of type Customer Bridge, while in Provider Bridge (802.1ad)
modality the port is of type Provider Network (see Physical Interface tab).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 105


1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. In the Bridge Port Type box relevant the wished port, select the option:
• Provider Network. Port where S-TAG’s (NNI) are observed and managed if the equipment im-
plements a Provider Bridge or a Provider Edge Bridge. More C-TAG’s can be present within one
S-TAG.
• Customer Network (port-based). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user, in
case of Provider Edge Bridge. All the packets with C-TAG received on this port are routed on a
single S-VLAN.
If this type of port is selected, the relevant parameter Acceptable Frame Type must be set to
value UnTagged and Priority Tagged (see Port Settings tab).
• Customer Network (s-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user already
associated to one S-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge.
If this type of port is selected, the relevant parameter Ingress Filtering must be set to value
Enabled (see Port Settings tab).
• Customer Edge - (c-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user already
associated to one C-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the optical module configuration of the Ethernet ports

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. Select the Optical tab.


The tab displays the configuration of the SFP optical module relevant to Ethernet ports with optical in-
terface available on the equipment.

Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING In the current equipment version, the flow control for the line ports is not available, while for
the port to the Radio it is assigned by default.
The flow control is implemented in the Ethernet connections in Full Duplex modality by means of the com-
mand PAUSE.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. Select the Data Flow tab.


The tab displays the configuration of the flow control.

Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, depending
on its priority (User Priority)

User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.

2. Select Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab.


The tab contains a table which indicates, for each port, the traffic classes which a packet in input is
assigned to depending on its priority 802.1p within Tag VLan (field User Priority).

3. To change the association priority-traffic class relevant to the packets in input from a port, execute one
of the following actions:
• Double click on the port.

106 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


• Select the row relevant to the port and press Show.
The Traffic Class Mapping window shows a table which indicates the traffic class (columns Classes)
which the priority 802.1p (rows Priority) is assigned to, for the packets in input to the selected port.

4. In the table, select the option corresponding to the wished combination: priority value - traffic class.
For the same priority value, only one class can be selected.
The values of the traffic class range from 0 to 7. Every single value represents a type of traffic:
• 0 - Best effort. Traffic not sensitive to QoS metric.
• 1 - Background. Traffic not interfering with the use of the network by users and applications.
• 2 - Standard (spare traffic). Traffic more important than that of Background type, but less im-
portant than the Excellent Load type.
• 3 - Excellent load. Traffic representing the best service offered to the most important customers.
• 4 - Controlled load. Traffic which must be received even when the network is overloaded.
• 5 - Video. Traffic with delay lower than 100 milliseconds (video traffic).
• 6 - Voice. Traffic with delay lower than 10 milliseconds (voice traffic).
• 7 - Network control. Traffic reserved to the network control.

5. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Port Manager.


The Tunneling tab shows the configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management, that is
the modality for which one protocol is encapsulated within another lower level protocol.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 107


Port Manager contextual area

WARNING The wording [MEF Services Active] next to the name of the contextual area indicates that MEF
services have been activated. The change of the forwarding parameters or of the port type by WEB LCT
could prevent its operation.

The contextual area displays the configuration of the Switch ports (traffic and auxiliary).

Tabs
Physical Interface tab. General configuration of the ports (traffic and auxiliary).
Optical tab. Displays the SFP optical module relevant to Ethernet ports with optical interface
available on the equipment.
Data Flow tab. Configuration of the flow control.
Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab. Mapping between priority of the packets in input to the Switch
and the traffic classes.
Tunneling tab. Configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Port Manager (command)

Physical Interface tab

The tab displays the general configuration of the ports (traffic and auxiliary).
Each row of the table corresponds to a port.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).
Read only parameter.

Description. Name of the port:


• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Read only parameter.

Media. Type of interface:


• Copper. Ethernet port with electrical interface.
• Fiber. Ethernet port with optical interface.
• ---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (i.e. Radio port).
Link Status. Status of the physical connection between the port and a device in network:
• Up. The link works: the physical connection is active and ready for the traffic ex-
change.
• Down. The link does not work: no physical connection has been enabled or the estab-
lished physical connection is not active or is defective.
Read only parameter.

108 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Admin State. Enabling state/loop of the port:
• Down. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.
• Up. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work.
• LoopBack. The line side loop is enabled for the port.
Value available only if the port is in Up status.
By default, the status is Down.
Auto Neg. Activation state of the autonegotiation for the port. The box:
• Active ( ) indicates that the autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the
transmission speed with the peer at the other end of the link, in order to find the op-
timal mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the Full Duplex modality without flow
control is proposed.
The port with optical interface can negotiate only the transmission speed 1Gb.
In this condition, next to the box the button Restart is displayed: press it to restart
the autonegotiation procedure for the port.
• Inactive ( ), indicates that the autonegotiation is not enabled. The port uses the
transmission speed configured in the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed
of a port), the flow control configured in the Data Flow tab, while the operation mo-
dality is Full Duplex.
• ---, indicates that the parameter is not meaningful for the port (e.g. Radio port).

Duplex. Transmission modality of the port:


• Full. The transmission modality is Full-Duplex.
• Half. The transmission modality is Half-Duplex.
Read only parameter.

Speed. Data transmission speed through the port: 10 Mb, 100 Mb, etc.

MDI/MDIX. Inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines:


• MDI. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is not active (Network Interface Card mo-
dality).
• MDIX. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active (Switch modality).
• Auto. The inversion of the Tx and Rx lines is active in automatic modality.
• ---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (i.e. Radio port).
Parameter meaningful only for ports with electrical interface.
MTU. Maximum dimension, in byte, of the packet accepted by the port.
The displayed value is the maximum value of the data field accepted by the interface without
the heading bytes Ethernet and CRC.

Bridge Port Type. Type of Bridge port:


• Customer Bridge. Port where C-TAG’s (UNI), are observed and managed if the equip-
ment implements a Customer Bridge.
Option available only when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.
• Provider Network. Port where S-TAG’s (NNI) are observed and managed if the equip-
ment implements a Provider Bridge or a Provider Edge Bridge. More C-TAG’s can be
present within one S-TAG.
Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Bridge (802.1ad) modality o Pro-
vider Edge Bridge modality.
• Customer Network (port-based). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single
user, in case of Provider Edge Bridge. All the packets with C-TAG received on this port
are routed on a single S-VLAN.
Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.
• Customer Network (s-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single
user already associated to one S-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge.
Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.
• Customer Edge (c-tagged). Port which allows the routing of the traffic of a single user
already associated to one C-TAG, in case of Provider Edge Bridge.
Option available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 109


Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Restart. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port.

See also
Modify the enabling status of a port
Activate the loop on line side of a port
Deactivate the loop on line side of a port
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port
Modify the transmission speed of a port
Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port
Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports
Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port

Optical tab

The tab displays the data of the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) optical module relevant to the Ethernet
ports with optical interface available on the equipment.
Each row of the table corresponds to a port.
All parameter are read only.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).
Description. Name of the port:
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port.
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port.
Fail Alarm. Status of the alarm which indicates the malfunctioning of the optical module (Plug-
in module Fail Alarm). The colour of the box displays the status of the alarm:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Criti-
cal, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.
• Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Vendor Name. Name of the optical module.

Vendor PN. Part number of the optical module.

Vendor SN. Serial number of the optical module.

Vendor Date. Manufacturing date of the optical module.

Wave Length (nm). Wave length (in nanometres) of the optical module.

Nominal Bit Rate (Mbps)). Nominal data transmission speed in Mbit/sec.

Link Length 9um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 9/125 µm fiber supported by the
optical module.

Link Length 50um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 50/125 µm fiber supported by
the optical module.
Link Length 62.5um (m). Maximum distance (in meters) of the 62.5/125 µm fiber supported
by the optical module.

110 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Data Flow tab

The tab displays the configuration of the flow control.


In the current equipment version, the flow control for the line ports is not available, while for the port to
the Radio it is assigned by default.
The flow control is implemented in the Ethernet connections in Full Duplex modality by means of the com-
mand PAUSE.

Each row of the table corresponds to a port.


All parameters in the tab are read only.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).

Description. Name of the port:


• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Flow Control Admin Status. Management of the flow control assigned by default for the spe-
cific port:
• Disabled. The transmission/reception of the MAC packets used for the transport of the
command PAUSE is disabled.
• Transmit. The transmission of the MAC packets used for the transport of the com-
mand PAUSE is enabled towards a remote device, in case of internal congestion due
to excess of received traffic.
• Receive. The reception from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the trans-
port of the command PAUSE is enabled, which interrupts the data transmission if re-
quired by an external equipment.
• Transmit & Receive. The transmission/reception to/from a remote device of the MAC
packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled.

Flow Control Oper Status. It displays the management modality of the flow control currently
used by the specific port:
• Disabled. The transmission/reception of the MAC packets used for the transport of the
command PAUSE is disabled.
• Transmit. The transmission of the MAC packets used for the transport of the com-
mand PAUSE is enabled towards a remote device, in case of internal congestion due
to excess of received traffic.
• Receive. The reception from a remote device of the MAC packets used for the trans-
port of the command PAUSE is enabled, which interrupts the data transmission if re-
quired by an external equipment.
• Transmit & Receive. The transmission/reception to/from a remote device of the MAC
packets used for the transport of the command PAUSE is enabled.

Traffic Class 802.1p Mapping tab

The tab shows the mapping between the priority 802.1p within the Tag VLan (field User Priority) of the
packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes managed by the equipment.
The packet received on a port with a specific priority will be forwarded according to the relevant traffic
class. For the packets without Tag, the priority is equivalent to the value of Default User Priority of the port
in input (see Port Settings tab).

Each row of the table corresponds to a port.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 111


Description. Name of the port:
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.

Priority 0. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 0 is assigned to.

Priority 1. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 1 is assigned to.

Priority 2. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 2 is assigned to.

Priority 3. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 3 is assigned to.

Priority 4. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 4 is assigned to.

Priority 5. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 5 is assigned to.

Priority 6. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 6 is assigned to.

Priority 7. This column displays, for every single port, the traffic class which a packet with User
Priority value equal to 7 is assigned to.

Push-button
Show. Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to, de-
pending on its priority (User Priority)

Tunneling tab

WARNING L2CP tunneling cannot be partially overlapped: all needed tunnelings must be enabled at the
same port. In case of:
• Cascaded links without traffic dropping, tunneling can be enabled at the first and the last port.
• Cascaded links with traffic dropping, tunnellings must be enabled on all intermediate ports.

The tab displays the configuration of the parameters for the Tunneling management, that is the modality
for which one protocol is encapsulated within another lower level protocol.
All parameters in the tab are read only.

Parameters
MAC ADDRESS CONFIGURATION
BPDU Priority. Predefined priority for all the BPDU packets encapsulated at level 2 and
received on the tunnel ports: 0 ÷ 7.
Default value 7.
STP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of BPDU STP packets.
LACP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of LACP packets.
Dot1x. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of Dot1x packets.
GVRP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of PDU GVRP packets.
GMRP. Destination MAC address used for the Tunneling of PDU GMRP packets.

TUNNEL STATUS
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number
(slot number/port number).
The list contains the ports of Customer Network (port-based), Customer Network (s-
tagged) or Customer Edge type.

112 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Dot1x. State of the Tunneling for Dot1x protocol:
• Peer. The Dot1x packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
• Tunnel. The received Dot1x packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and
PEB’s.
• Discard. The Dot1x packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
LACP. State of the Tunneling for LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) protocol:
• Peer. The LACP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
• Tunnel. The received LACP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the
Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.
• Discard. The LACP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
STP. State of the Tunneling for STP (Spanning Tree Protocol) protocol:
• Peer. The STP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
• Tunnel. The received STP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by the
Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and PEB’s.
• Discard. The STP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
GVRP. State of the Tunneling for GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) protocol:
• Peer. The GVRP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
• Tunnel. The received GVRP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and
PEB’s.
• Discard. The GVRP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
GMRP. State of the Tunneling for GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration Protocol) protocol:
• Peer. The GMRP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
• Tunnel. The received GMRP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and
PEB’s.
• Discard. The GMRP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.
IGMP. State of the Tunneling for IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) protocol:
• Peer. The IGMP packets received by the Bridge are accepted and processed.
• Tunnel. The received IGMP packets are transmitted in transparent mode by
the Provider network, this avoids the processing of the packets by PB’s and
PEB’s.
• Discard. The IGMP packets received by the Bridge are dropped.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 113


VLAN

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING In ALFOplus80HD equipment, VLAN’s work in the Switch in VLAN Aware Bridging modality.
In this modality, the bridge identify the packets with TAG VLAN and can insert and remove TAG’s in the
packet heading.
The Switch operates in compliance with Standard IEEE 802.1q and 802.1ad.

The command VLAN manages the parameters relevant to the configuration and the management of the
virtual LAN’s (VLAN).

Operations
BASIC SETTINGS
Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management
Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table
Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch

PORT SETTINGS
Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port
Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port
Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID)
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority
802.1p received on the port
STATIC VLANS
Verify the existing static VLANs
Create one or more static VLANs
Modify the configuration of a static VLAN
Delete one or more static VLANs

GUI
VLAN contextual area

Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.


The Basic Settings tab displays the basic configuration of the VLAN management.

Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The MAC-based routing functionality in the Switch is available only if enabled this function.
The setting is common for all port of the Switch.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.


2. In the Global MAC Learning Status box, select the option:
• Enable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled.
• Disable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is disabled. In this condition MAC
Table is not used.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

114 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table (Global MAC Learn-
ing Status - Enable) is enabled.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. In the MAC Addr Table Aging Time box, set the validity period of the MAC addresses, dynamically ac-
quired and stored in the specific table (number between 10 and 1000000 seconds).
Default value 300 seconds.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Set, in the box Unicast MAC Learning Limit, the limit of MAC Unicast addresses per VLAN managed by
the Switch (number between 0 and 16000).
The limit represents the maximum number of different MAC unicast addresses which can be learned by
the Switch.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation not available for the ports of type Customer Network (port-based) or Customer Edge
(see Bridge Port Type - Physical Interface tab), which have always the value UnTagged and Priority Tagged.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Port Settings tab.

3. In the Acceptable Frame Types box relevant the wished port, select the option:
• All. The port accepts all the following packets:
• Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port and
one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.
• UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not valid by the port.
• Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the port
and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.
• Tagged. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets
are rejected.
• UnTagged and Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority Tagged packets.
The Tagged packets are rejected.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation not available for the ports of type Customer Network (s-tagged) (see Bridge Port Type
- Physical Interface tab), which have always the value Enable).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 115


1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Port Settings tab.

3. In the Ingress Filtering box relevant the wished port, select the option:
• Enabled. The port accepts, in input, only packets with VLAN ID contained in VTU and the input
port must be member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
• Disabled. The port does not execute any check: all the packets are accepted.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The default VLAN identifier of a port is used to assign a VLAN to the UnTagged or Priority Tagged
packets received on the port itself. The parameter is used for the classification of the VLAN’s on port basis
(Port-Based VLAN classification).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Port Settings tab.

3. In the PVID box relevant the wished port, set a value between 1 and 4094.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p
received on the port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Port Settings tab.

3. In the Default User Priority box relevant the wished port, set a value between 0 (lowest priority) and 7
(highest priority).

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify the existing static VLANs

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Static VLANs tab.


The tab displays the existing static virtual LANs.

Create one or more static VLANs

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Static VLANs tab.

3. Press Add.

116 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


4. If you wish to create:
• More VLAN’s at the same time, expand the area Group Add.
Set, in the box VLAN ID Start, the identifier (between 2 and 4094) of the first VLAN of the range.
Set, in the box VLAN ID Stop, the identifier of the last VLAN of the range.
The value of VLAN ID Stop must be greater than the value of VLAN ID Start and no VLAN with
identifier between Start and Stop values must not be present in the list.
The system creates a number of VLAN’s (and inserts the corresponding rows in the table) equal
to the difference between the values of the parameters VLAN ID Stop and VLAN ID Start, with
progressive identifiers from the lowest value to the highest value, and automatically assigns the
corresponding VLAN Name using the format <Label> <identifier>.
All the VLAN’s created automatically assume the same enabling policy for the transit of packets
through the ports of the Switch.
• A single VLAN, set, in the box VLAN ID, the identifier (between 2 and 4094) you wish to assign
to the virtual LAN.
An identifier greater then that indicated in the field Max. VLAN ID cannot be used.
Set, in the box VLAN Name, the name (alphanumeric string, 32 characters at most) you wish to
assign to the VLAN.
The system automatically suggests, as VLAN name, VLAN <identifier>. This name can be
changed as you wish.

5. Activate ( ), in the box Member Ports, the ports enabled to the transit of packets with VLAN ID equal
to the VLAN’s one.
For every port are indicated the port identifier (slot number/port number), the port name (LAN1, LAN
2, etc.) and the type of Bridge port (Customer Bridge, Provider Network, etc.) (see Bridge Port Type,
Physical Interface tab).
At least one port must be activated to create a VLAN.

6. Activate ( ), in the box Untagged Ports, the ports whose packets in output the Tag 802.1Q is removed
from.
For every port are indicated the port identifier (slot number/port number), the port name (Mngt, LAN-
1, etc. - see Description, Physical Interface tab) and the type of Bridge port (Customer Bridge, Provider
Network, etc. - see Bridge Port Type, Physical Interface tab).

7. Select, in the box Ether Type, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which the packets must have to be
identified as belonging to the VLAN:
• 0x8100. Customer VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1Q specifications.
• 0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications.

8. Press Apply and confirm.


The Static VLANs tab displays the row relevant to the new VLAN.

Modify the configuration of a static VLAN

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Static VLANs tab.

3. Double click on the box relevant to the parameter of VLAN you wish to change.
Except for the identifier (VLAN ID), all the parameters of a VLAN can be modified (VLAN Name, Member
Ports, Untagged Ports, Ether Type).
The parameter setting modes are the same pointed out in par. Create one or more static VLANs.

4. Press Apply and confirm.


The changes are confirmed in Virtual Lan Config tab.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 117


Delete one or more static VLANs

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > VLAN.

2. Select the Static VLANs tab.

3. Select the VLAN you wish to delete.


The multiple selection can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.

4. Press Remove and confirm.

118 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


VLAN contextual area

WARNING The wording [MEF Services Active] next to the name of the contextual area indicates that MEF
services have been activated. The change of parameters relevant to the VLAN management from WEB LCT
could preclude the operation of the VLAN’s themselves.

The contextual area displays the parameters relevant to the configuration and the management of the vir-
tual LAN’s (VLAN).

Tabs
Basic Settings tab. Basic configuration of the VLAN management.
Port Settings tab. VLAN management parameters relevant to the physical ports available in the
equipment.
Static VLANs tab. Configuration of the existing static VLANs.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
VLAN (command)

Basic Settings tab

The tab displays the basic configuration of the VLAN management.

Parameters
LEARNING OPTIONS
Learning Mode. Learning mode for the addresses in the MAC Table.
The writing Independent VLAN Learning indicates that the partition and the indicization
on VID basis of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled. The learning registers
them in a MAC Table segment whose index is the value of the VID contained in the VLAN’s
in input to the Switch and registered in VTU.
In this modality, the information learned by a VLAN are not used by other VLAN’s for the
packet forwarding.
Parameter common to all port of the Switch.
Global MAC Learning Status. Enabling status of the learning of the addresses in the
MAC Table:
• Enable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is enabled.
• Disable. The learning of the Source Addresses in the MAC Table is disabled. In
this condition MAC Table is not used.
Parameter common to all port of the Switch.
MAC Add. Table Aging Time. Validity period of the MAC addresses stored in the MAC
Table (expressed in seconds).
Default value 300 seconds.
Unicast MAC Learning Limit. Maximum number of different MAC unicast addresses per
VLAN which can be learned by the Switch.

VLAN STATUS
Max. VLAN ID. VLAN identifier accepted by the Switch as maximum value.
Read only parameter.
Max Supported VLAN. Maximum number of VLAN’s which can be managed by the
Switch.
Read only parameter.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 119


Num of VLANs in the System. Total number of VLAN’s currently managed by the
equipment.
Read only parameter.

See also
Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table
Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table
Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses per VLAN managed by the Switch

Port Settings tab

The tab displays the VLAN management parameters relevant to the physical ports available in the equip-
ment.

Each row of the table corresponds to a port.


Selecting the heading of a column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alphanumeric order with
respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards. The next selec-
tion sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed downwards) and so on.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).
Read only parameter.

Acceptable Frame Types. Types of BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) packets accepted in input
by the port and subjected to control policies (see Ingress Filtering):
• All. The port accepts all the following packets:
• Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the
port and one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.
• UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not valid
by the port.
• Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid
by the port and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.
• Tagged. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority Tagged
packets are rejected.
• UnTagged and Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority
Tagged packets. The Tagged packets are rejected.
Default value All.
The parameter has always value UnTagged and Priority Tagged for the ports of type Customer
Network (port-based) and Customer Edge (see Bridge Port Type - Physical Interface tab).

Ingress Filtering. Control modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on the port:
• Enabled. The port accepts in input only packets with VLAN ID contained in VTU and
the port in input must be a member of this VLAN, otherwise the packet is discarded.
• Disabled. The port performs no check: all the packets are accepted.
Default value Disabled.
The parameter has always value Enable for the ports of type Customer Network (s-tagged) (see
Bridge Port Type - Physical Interface tab).

PVID. Default VLAN identifier assigned to the UnTagged or Priority Tagged packets received on
the port itself: 1 ÷ 4094.
The parameter is used for the VLAN classification on port basis (Port-Based VLAN classification).

Default User Priority. Default value to insert in the field User Priority (priority 802.1p within
Tag VLan) of the packets without priority value received on the port: 0 (lowest priority) ÷ 7
(highest priority).

120 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


See also
Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port
Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port
Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID)
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p
received on the port

Static VLANs tab

The tab displays the configuration of the physical ports of the Switch.
The static VLAN’s are configured per port (Port-based VLAN) differently from the dynamic VLAN’s which
are configured according to MAC address or to protocol.
During the creation of a static VLAN, one port of the Switch is assigned to the specific VLAN, so that the
device connected to that port automatically becomes member of the assigned VLAN.

Each row of the table corresponds to a VLAN.

Parameters
VLAN ID. VLAN identifier.
Read only parameter.
Selecting the heading of this column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing numeric order
with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip directed upwards.
The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed with the tip directed
downwards) and so on.

VLAN Name. VLAN name.

Member Ports. Ports enabled to the transit of packets with VLAN ID equal to that of the VLAN.
For every port, the port identifier is indicated (slot number/port number). The ports are sepa-
rated by comma.

Untagged Ports. Ports whose packets in output the Tag 802.1Q is removed from.
For every port, the port identifier is indicated (slot number/port number). The ports are sepa-
rated by comma.

Ether Type. Value of EtherType which the packets in input must have to be identified as be-
longing to the VLAN:
• 0x8100. Customer VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1Q specifications.
• 0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications

Push-button
Add. Create one or more static VLANs
Remove. Delete one or more static VLANs

See also
Modify the configuration of a static VLAN

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 121


Prov. Bridge-VLAN

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Command available only when the Switch is in Provider Edge Bridge modality.

The command Prov. Bridge-VLAN displays the parameters relevant to the VLAN’s when the Switch is in
Provider Edge Bridge modality.

Operations
Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration)
Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration)

GUI
Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area

Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-VLAN.


The C-VID Registration tab shows the C-VID registration table.

Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-VLAN.


The PEP Configuration tab shows the Provider Edge Port configuration table.

122 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Prov. Bridge-VLAN contextual area

WARNING The wording [MEF Services Active] next to the name of the contextual area indicates that MEF
services have been activated.

The contextual area shows the parameters relevant to the VLAN’s when the Switch is in Provider Edge
Bridge modality.

Tabs
C-VID Registration tab. C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration).
PEP Configuration tab. Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration).

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Prov. Bridge-VLAN (command)

C-VID Registration tab

The tab displays the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration).

An internal connection between one Customer Network (CNP) port on S-VLAN component and one Provider
Edge (PEP) port on C-VLAN component is instanced for every VLAN.
The connection between CNP and PEP is set by the mutual entries in C-VID registration table (C-VID Reg-
istration) and PEP configuration table (see PEP Configuration tab).
In C-VID registration table, one entry is created for every C-VLAN supported in the C-VLAN component
associated with one Customer Edge port (CEP).
The CEP identifier and the C-VID combination identify one PEP. The entry contains (among the other pa-
rameters) a S-VID value corresponding to the PVID of CNP, which associates the PEP to a specific Customer
Network port (CNP).

All parameters in the tab are read only.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).
The list contains the ports of Customer Edge type.

C-VLAN ID. Customer VLAN ID value present in the C-TAG of the packets in input to the specific
port: 1 ÷ 4094.

S-VLAN ID. VLAN ID of the service instance which the port and the Customer VLAN ID are
mapped to: 1 ÷ 4094.

Untagged PEP. Forwarding modality of the packets, with the specific C-VID, in inputs to the
Customer Edge port through the Provider Edge port:
• TRUE. The packets are forwarded without TAG C-VLAN.
• FALSE. The packets are forwarded with a valid C-TAG and C-VID.

Untagged CEP. Forwarding modality of the packets, with the specific C-VID through the Cus-
tomer Edge port:
• TRUE. The packets are forwarded without TAG C-VLAN.
• FALSE. The packets are forwarded with TAG C-VLAN. If this is missing, it is added.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 123


Push-button
Add. Push-button not available in this version.
Remove. Push-button not available in this version.

PEP Configuration tab

The tab displays the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration).

For every VLAN, one internal connection is instanced between one Customer Network port (CNP) on S-
VLAN component and one Provider Edge port (PEP) on C-VLAN component.
The connection between CNP and PEP is set by the mutual entries in C-VID registration table (see C-VID
Registration tab) and PEP configuration table.
In PEP configuration table, one entry is created for every S-VID corresponding to one service instance ac-
cessible by the C-VLAN component.
The Customer Edge Port (CEP) identifier and the S-VID combination identify one CNP. The entry contains
(among the other parameters) one C-VID value corresponding to the PVID of PEP, which associates the
CNP to a specific PEP.

All parameters in the tab are read only.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).
The list contains the ports of Customer Edge type.

S-VID. S-VLAN identifier: 1 ÷ 4094.

P-VID. Default VLAN ID assigned to the UnTagged packets received on the PEP port: 1 ÷ 4094.

Default User Priority. Default priority value (User Priority) assigned to the UnTagged packets
received on the PEP port: 0 (lowest priority) ÷ 7 (highest priority).
Default value 0.

Acceptable Frame Types. Types of BPDU packets accepted in input by the PEP port and sub-
jected to control policies (see Ingress Filtering):
• All. The port accepts all the following packets:
• Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid by the
port and one VLAN Tag different from 0 and the field User Priority.
• UnTagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as not valid
by the port.
• Priority Tagged. Packet containing, in its heading, one TPID identified as valid
by the port and one VLAN Tag equal to 0 and the field User Priority.
• Tagged Only. The port accepts only the Tagged packets. The UnTagged and Priority
Tagged packets are rejected.
• Untagged & Priority Tagged. The port accepts only the UnTagged and Priority Tagged
packets. The Tagged packets are rejected.
Default value Admit-All.

Ingress Filtering. Control modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on the PEP port:
• TRUE. The port drops the packets classified to the specific C-VLAN if the port is not a
member of the C-VLAN itself.
• FALSE. The PEP port performs no check: all the packets are accepted.
Default value FALSE.

COS Preservation. Enabling status, for the PEP port, of the function Class of Service Preserva-
tion for a Service Provider:
• Enable. Function CoS preservation enabled: the mapping between the priority of the
packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes is preserved in the Provider network.
• Disabled. Function CoS preservation disabled: the mapping between the priority of
the packets in input to the Switch and the traffic classes is not preserved in the Pro-
vider network.
Default value Disabled.

124 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Prov. Bridge-EtherType

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Command available only when the Switch is configured in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge
Bridge modality.

The Prov. Bridge-EtherType command manages the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet
ports.

Operations
Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports
Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports

GUI
Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area

Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-EtherType.


The Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area shows the EtherType values in the S-Tag (Service Tag)
field for every Ethernet port.

Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Typical values of EtherType fields:


• 0x8100. Customer VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1Q specifications.
• 0x88a8. Service VLAN Tag in according to Ieee802.1ad specifications.
• 0x9100. Service VLAN Tag related to a “not standard QinQ protocol”.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Prov. Bridge-EtherType.


2. Set, in the field Ingress EtherType of the specific port, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which must
have the packets in input to the Ethernet port.
For the port of PNP (Provider Network Port) type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other ports,
the default value is 0x88a8.

3. Set, in the field Egress EtherType of the specific port, the hexadecimal value of EtherType which must
be applied to the packets in output from the Ethernet ports.
For the port of CEP (Customer Edge Port) and PNP type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other
ports, the default value is 0x88a8.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 125


Prov. Bridge-EtherType contextual area

WARNING Contextual area available only when the Switch is configured in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge
Bridge modality.

The contextual area displays the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports.
Each row of the table corresponds to a port.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).
Read-only parameter.

Description. Name of the port:


• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Read-only parameter.
Ingress EtherType. Value EtherType in the field S-Tag of the packets in input to the Ethernet
port.
For the port of PNP (Provider Network Port) type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the other
ports, the default value is 0x88a8.

Egress EtherType. Value EtherType in the field S-Tag applied to the packets in output from
the Ethernet ports.
For the port of CEP (Customer Edge Port) and PNP type, the default value is 0x8100. For all the
other ports, the default value is 0x88a8.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Prov. Bridge-EtherType (command)

126 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


LLF

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command LLF allows configuring the operation of LLF functionality for the equipment.

Operations
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN
Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN
Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio
Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality
Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio

GUI
LLF contextual area

See also
Bidirectional LLF (info)

Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.


The LLF contextual area displays the status of the LLF functionality for every equipment port.

Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

2. Press Add in Ports area.


3. Set, in the Port box, the LAN for the functionality is configured.
It is not possible to select the port LAN 3 or a port already selected for the functionality.

4. Set, in the LLF Status box, the status of LLF functionality:


• Disable. The functionality is disabled.
• Enable. The functionality is enabled.

5. Set, in the Alarm to Circuit box, the status of forwarding of the LLF alarm on a given radio circuit as-
sociated to the considered port:
• Disable. The alarm is not forwarded to the radio.
• Enable. The alarm is forwarded to the radio.
6. Set, in the Delay Time box, the interval (hysteresis) (value between 0 and 10 seconds) after which the
modality Link Loss Forwarding in reception is activated.
The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id.
Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables the corresponding LAN.
In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be cleared on the
radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered LAN.

7. Press OK.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 127


Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING A port cannot be removed if there is at least one radio circuit associated to the port itself. If the
operator attempts executing this operation, the system displays an error message. First remove all the
radio circuits associated to the LAN and then remove the port.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

2. Select the row of the table in the Ports area corresponding to the port for which you wish not to manage
the LLF functionality.

3. Press Remove in the Ports area.

Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

2. In the Ports area, select the row corresponding to the LAN for which you wish to configure the func-
tionality.

3. In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, press Add.

4. In the Add New Circuit window, set the values of the following parameters:
• Circuit. Circuit of the radio where transmitting the LOS signal. Every radio has eight circuits. It
is not possible to select an already used circuit (displayed grey in the selection menu).
• LOS to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of LOS alarm on the radio circuit:
• Disable. The alarm is not forwarded to the radio.
• Enable. The alarm is forwarded to the radio.

5. Press OK.

Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

2. Select, in the Ports area, the row of the table corresponding to the port for which you wish to remove
a radio circuit.

3. Select, in the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, the row of the table corresponding to the
radio circuit you wish to remove.

4. Press Remove in the Mapped circuit on current port selection area.

Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.


The LLF Status box indicates the enabling status of LLF functionality for the considered port:
• Disable. The functionality is disabled.
• Enable. The functionality is enabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in the menu.

3. Press Apply.

128 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.


The box Alarm to Circuit indicates the enabling status of the forwarding of LLF alarm for the LAN con-
sidered on the radio:
• Disable. The disabled status of the local LAN is not communicated to the remote equipment.
• Enable. The disabled status of the local LAN is communicated to the remote equipment by means
of the selected radio circuit.

2. To change the parameter, select the box and then select the wished value in menu.

3. Press Apply.

Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.


The box Delay Time indicates the hysteresis value (in seconds) for the LLF functionality in reception.
The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RADIO... Link Id.
Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables the corresponding LAN.
In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be cleared on the
radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered LAN.

2. To change the hysteresis value, type the wished value in the box.
3. Press Apply.

Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

2. Select, in the Ports area, the row corresponding to the LAN for which you wish to configure the func-
tionality.
In the Mapped circuit on current port selection area, the box LOS to Circuit indicates the enabling status
of the forwarding of the LOS alarm on the radio circuit:
• Disable. The LOS alarm of the LAN is not forwarded to the radio.
• Enable. The LOS alarm of the LAN is forwarded to the radio.

3. Press OK.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 129


LLF contextual area

The contextual area shows the configuration of the LLF functionality (Link Loss Forwarding).

Parameters
AREA PORTS
Port. Identifier of the port. The ID value is the combination between the slot number and
the port number (slot number/port number).
Read-only parameter.
Descr. Name of the port:
• LAN 1. First Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).
• LAN 2. Second Ethernet line port (electrical or optical).
• LAN 4. Fourth Ethernet line port (electrical).
• LAN 5. Fifth Ethernet line port (optical).
• LAN 6. Sixth Ethernet line port (optical).
• LAN C. Seventh Ethernet line port (optical)
• LAN D. Eighth Ethernet line port (optical).
Read-only parameter.
LLF Status. Enabling status of LLF functionality for the considered port:
• Disable. The functionality is disabled.
• Enable. The functionality is enabled.
Alarm to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of LLF alarm present on the consid-
ered LAN to the radio:
• Disable. The disabled status of the local LAN is not communicated to the remote
equipment.
• Enable. The disabled status of the local LAN is communicated to the remote equip-
ment by means of the selected radio circuit.
Delay Time. Hysteresis (in seconds) of LLF functionality in reception.
The alarm received from the radio direction (IDU BRANCH... Demodulator Fail Alarm, RA-
DIO... Link Id. Alarm) must persist for Delay Time seconds before the equipment disables
the corresponding LAN.
In the same way, if the LAN is disabled by LLF functionality, the radio alarm must be
cleared on the radio for Delay Time seconds before the equipment enables the considered
LAN.

AREA MAPPED CIRCUITS ON CURRENT PORT SELECTION

Circuit. Radio circuit where forwarding the LOS signal. Every radio has eight circuits. It
is not possible to select an already used circuit (displayed in grey in the selection menu).
Link ID. Identifier of the considered radio link.
LOS to Circuit. Enabling status of the forwarding of the LOS alarm on the radio circuit:
• Disable. The alarm is not forwarded to the radio.
• Enable. The alarm is forwarded to the radio.
Signal Fail. Indication of alarm present on the circuit.

Push-button
Apply. Confirms the changes.
Refresh. Updates the context.
Help. Opens the help on-line.
AREA PORTS
Add. Adds one port to the list.
Remove. Deletes the selected port from the list.
AREA MAPPED CIRCUITS ON CURRENT PORT SELECTION

Add. Adds a radio circuit relevant to the port selected in the Ports area.
Remove. Removes the selected circuit from the list.
Refresh Signal Fail. Updates the alarm signal.

130 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


See also
LLF (command)
Bidirectional LLF (info)
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN
Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN
Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio
Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality
Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 131


Bidirectional LLF (info)

The bidirectional LLF functionality allows interrupting the connection with the remote equipment (in both
directions) as consequence of the disabling of the LANs of the local equipment due to Link Loss Forwarding.

For the correct configuration of the bidirectional LLF functionality for a radio connection, it is necessary to
perform the operations described in the following example.
Suppose you wish to disable the LAN-1 ports (on local and remote equipment) as consequence of LLF de-
tected by the local LAN-1 port.

Operations to perform for the LOCAL equipment via the WEB LCT page:

a. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

b. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality setting the following values:
Port: LAN 1
LLF Status: Enable
Alarm to Circuit: Enable
Delay Time: any value

c. Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN selecting LAN 1
in the Ports area and setting the following values:
Circuit: #1 Link ID: ODU-A
LOS to Circuit: Enable

d. Press Apply and continue.

Operations to perform for the REMOTE equipment via the WEB LCT page:

a. Select Base Band > Ethernet > LLF.

b. Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality setting the following values:
Port: LAN 1
LLF Status: Enable
Alarm to Circuit: Enable
Delay Time: any value

c. Press Apply and continue.

With this configuration, an alarm in reception on the remote terminal causes the activation of LLF alarm
and the consequent disabling of the associated LAN-1 port on both the terminals.

See also
LLF (command)
LLF contextual area

132 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Queue Depth

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Queue Depth manages the depth of the output queues.

Operations
Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output
Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output

GUI
Queue Depth contextual area

Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Queue Depth.


The Queue Depth contextual area displays policy used to manage the depth of the queues in output.

Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Queue Depth.

2. Press the option Active relevant to the policy you wish to activate and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 133


Queue Depth contextual area

The contextual area displays the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output (8 queues
per port).
The Switch can insert a limited number of packets into every queue. This limit, indicated as depth, can be
configured by the user. During the period of high traffic, a queue is filled by packets waiting for the trans-
mission. When a queue reaches its limit, by default the Switch discards the packets until when the queue
is not full longer.

Parameters
Profile. Available profiles of the output queues:
• Full shared memory. This configuration, identical for every queue, allows the dynamic
allocation of memory per queue up to 1/8 of the total memory available in every mo-
ment.
• Priority based memory allocation. This configuration is based on the principle for
which the lower priority traffic needs longer queues. The proper forwarding of the
traffic at the different priorities (and queue) allows achieving the wished length.
• Uniform memory allocation. This configuration provides queues with constant length,
independently from the traffic priority. The use of WRED algorithms allows changing
the method used to store the different traffic types, obtaining different depths.

Profile Description. Detailed description of the configuration of the selected profile.


If the selected option is:
• Full shared memory. The description is the following:
Full shared memory allocation
Hardware default
• Priority based memory allocation. The description is the following:
Memory allocation dependent on scheduling priority
Lower priority queues are wider than higher priority queues
Reference frame length: 2048 byte
Total reserved memory: 92 Mbyte
Total shared memory: 0 Mbyte
Radio port reserved memory [Mbyte]:32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1, 0.512, 0.256
Line port reserved memory [Mbyte]: 4, 2, 1 0.512, 0.256, 0.128, 0.128, 0.128
• Uniform memory allocation. The description is the following:
Uniform memory allocation
At each port, all queues have the same length
Reference frame length: 2048 byte
Total reserved memory: 76.5 Mbyte
Total shared memory: 0 Mbyte
Radio port reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 4
Line port reserved memory per queue [Mbyte]: 2

Action. Status of the profile:


• Currently Active. Profile currently in use.
• Activate. Profile not in use. Select the option to Modify the policy for the management
of the depth of the queues in output.

Push-button
Refresh. Updates the context.
Help. Opens the help on-line.

See also
Queue Depth (command)

134 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Statistics

Interface. It displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of packets/
bytes in input/output.
The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Sta-
tistics group).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 135


Interface

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Interface command displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of
packets/bytes in input/output
The count of a counter is cyclic and always active.
The depth of the events stored by each counter is equal to 2^32; when this limit is reached, the count
restarts from zero. In any moment, you can reset all the counters.
The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statis-
tics group).

Operations
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group)
Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group)
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group)
Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group)

GUI
Interface contextual area

Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface.


The Interface tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group).

Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The operation resets even the RMon statistics counter (see Ethernet Statistics and Ethernet Ser-
vice Statistics).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface.

2. In the Interface tab, press Reset Counters and confirm.


All the counters of the tab are set to zero.

Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface.

2. Select the Ethernet tab.


The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group).

136 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group)

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The operation resets even the RMon statistic counters (see Ethernet Statistics and Ethernet Ser-
vice Statistics).

1. Select Base Band > Ethernet > Statistics > Interface.

2. Select the Ethernet tab.

3. Press Reset Counters and confirm.


All the counters of the tab are set to zero.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 137


Interface contextual area

The contextual area displays the trend of the traffic on the Ethernet ports displaying the counters of pack-
ets/bytes in input/output.
The counters are based on the standard RFC 1213 (Interfaces group) and RFC 1284 (Ethernet-like Statis-
tics group).

Tabs
Interface tab. Counters of packets/bytes in input/output (Interfaces group).
Ethernet tab. Counters of packets/bytes in input/output (Ethernet-like Statistics group).

Push-button
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Interface (command)

Interface tab

The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group).
Each row of the table corresponds to a port.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).

Descr. Name of the port:


• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
The remnant rows indicate the counters (see Tab.3).

Push-button
Refresh. Update the context.
Reset Counters. Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group).

Ethernet tab

The tab displays the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group).
Each row of the table corresponds to a port.

Parameters
Port. Port identifier. The ID value is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot
number/port number).

Descr. Name of the port:


• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

138 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
The remnant rows indicate the counters (see Tab.4).

Push-button
Refresh. Update the context.
Reset Counters. Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group).

Tab.3 Counters of Ethernet port (RFC 1213 - Interfaces group)

Counter Packets with length Packet with length Packet with length FCS *
Description lower than longer than n between 64 and n
64 octects (MTU value) octets (MTU value) octets
(Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) (Good packet)

Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi


cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast

Received Octects x x x x x x x x x OK
Total number of octets received
x x x x x x x x x KO

Received Unicast Packets - - - - - - x - - OK


Total number of Unicast packets received
- - - - - - - - - KO
Received Not Unicast Packets - - - - - - - x x OK
Total number of Non-Unicast packets received
- - - - - - - - - KO

Received Discards (Packets) - - - - - - x x x OK


Total number of inbound packets which were discarded due
- - - - - - - - - KO
to forbidden forwarding or policing violation

Received Errors x x x - - - - - - OK
Total number of inbound packets discarded because con-
x x x x x x x x x KO
tained errors.

Transmitted Octects - - - - - - x x x OK
Total number of transmitted octets
- - - - - - - - - KO

Transmitted Unicast Packets - - - - - - x - - OK


Total number of Unicast packets transmitted
- - - - - - - - - KO
Transmitted Not Unicast Packets - - - - - - - x x OK
Total number of Non-Unicast packets transmitted
- - - - - - - - - KO

Transmitted Discards (Packets) - - - x x x x x x OK


Total number of outbound packets discarded
- - - - - - - - - KO

x Counter incremented
- Counter not incremented.

* OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct.


KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 139


Tab.4 Counters of Ethernet port (RFC 1284 - Ethernet-like Statistics group)

Counter Packets with length Packet with length Packet with length FCS *
Description lower than longer than n between 64 and n
64 octects (MTU value) octets (MTU value) octets
(Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) (Good packet)

Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi


cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast

Align. Errors - - - - - - - - - OK
A count of frames received on a particular interface that
x x x x x x x x x KO
are not an integral number of octets in length and do not
pass the FCS check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is in-
cremented when the Alignment Error status is returned by
the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received
frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, ac-
cording to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Manage-
ment, counted exclusively according to the error status
presented to the LLC.

FCS Errors - - - - - - - - - OK
A count of frames received on a particular interface that
are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass - - - x x x x x x KO
the FCS check.
The count represented by an instance of this object is in-
cremented when the Frame Check Error status is
returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC us-
er). Received frames for which multiple error conditions
obtain are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Lay-
er Management, counted exclusively according to the error
status presented to the LLC.
This value does not include packets shorter than 64 bytes.

Frame Too Long - - - x x x - - - OK


A count of frames received on a particular interface that
exceed the maximum permitted frame size. - - - x x x - - - KO
The count represented by an instance of this object is in-
cremented when the Frame Too Long status is returned by
the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received
frames for which multiple error conditions obtain are, ac-
cording to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Manage-
ment, counted exclusively according to the error status
presented to the LLC.

x Counter incremented
- Counter not incremented.

* OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct.


KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

140 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


DCN

MNGT Port Configuration. It manages the Ethernet port reserved to supervision of the equipment (LAN
3).
Routing Table. It manages the Routing Table of the equipment.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 141


MNGT Port Configuration

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING In version 1.2, the system can be managed by means of the In-Band Management using the
management port (Mngt) for the contemporary transport of traffic and supervision (VLAN dedicated).

The MNGT Port Configuration command manages the Ethernet port reserved to local and remote super-
vision of the equipment (management port).

Operations
Verify the configuration of the management port
Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port
Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision
Modify the enabling status of management port
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port
Modify the transmission speed of the management port
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port
Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port

GUI
MNGT Port Configuration contextual area

Verify the configuration of the management port

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.


The MNGT Port Configuration contextual area displays the configuration of the management port.

Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.

2. In the IP Address box, set the IP address of the management port.


The address has to be compatible with the setting of the relevant Net Mask field.

3. In the Net Mask box, set the mask for the network address definition.

4. Press Apply and confirm.


5. Press Store and confirm.

6. Press Restart and confirm.

Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.

2. In the Default Gateway box, type the IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway.

142 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


3. Press Apply and confirm.

4. Press Store and confirm.

5. Press Restart and confirm.

Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The management VLAN must be present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab) and, in order
to operate correctly as VLAN for the In-band Management, management port must be enabled for the tran-
sit of the packets with VLAN ID equal to that of VLAN.
The VLAN can have, as Member Port, other Ethernet ports. In this case, even these ports will be used for
the contemporary transit of traffic and supervision (In-band Management).

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.

2. Set, in the VLAN ID box, the wished VLAN.


The list will display all the VLAN’s registered in VLAN Table.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

4. Press Store and confirm.


5. Press Restart and confirm.

Modify the enabling status of management port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.


2. In the Admin State box, select the option:
• Down. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traffic.
• Up. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work (Link Status -
Down).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Remember that a peer-to-peer connection works properly if the two peers have set the same
autonegotiation management modality.
The values of the parameters Auto Neg. and Speed cannot be changed at the same time. First change one
of the parameters and confirm after having pressed Apply, then change the other parameter.

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.

2. In the Auto Neg. box, select the option:


• Enabled. The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission speed with the
peer at the other end of the link, in order to find the optimal mutual connectivity. In autonego-
tiation, the modality Full Duplex without flow control is proposed.
• Disabled. The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission speed configured in
the Speed box (see Modify the transmission speed of the management port), the flow control id
disabled and the operation modality is Full Duplex.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 143


3. Press Apply and confirm.

Modify the transmission speed of the management port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is disabled (Auto Neg. - Disabled).


If the autonegotiation is enabled, the speed is automatically configured according to the hardware after
having negotiated with the peer at the other end of the connection.
The values of the parameters Auto Neg. and Speed cannot be changed at the same time. First change one
of the parameters and confirm after having pressed Apply, then change the other parameter.

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.

2. In the Speed box, select the option:


• 100 Mb. he data transmission speed through the port is 100 Mbit/s.
• 10 Mb. The data transmission speed through the port is 10 Mbit/s.
3. Press Apply and confirm.

Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if autonegotiation is enabled (Auto Neg. - Enabled).

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.

2. Press Restart Auto Neg. and confirm.

Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The alarm can be enabled/disabled using the Alarm Severity Config. command.
The only difference is that, with this operation, you intervene only on the alarm Loss of Signal of the man-
agement port while, in the context Alarm Severity Config, you intervene on the alarm Loss of Signal of all
the LANs.
Depending on the setting made in the two contexts, the alarm status will be as indicated in Tab.5.

1. Select Base Band > DCN > MNGT Port Configuration.

2. In the Port Alarm Report box, select the option:


• Disabled, to disable the alarm. The detection of the alarm is not registered in the equipment
controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible management program: as
the alarm had never occurred.
• Enabled, to enable the alarm. The detection of the alarm is registered in the equipment control-
ler and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see Alarm Severity Config. contextual
area), the alarm is communicated to the management system and displayed in the current
alarms and the history alarms.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

144 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Tab.5 Enabling status of the Loss of Signal alarm

Context

MNGT Port Configuration Alarm Severity Config * Loss of Signal Alarm


(Port Alarm Report) (Severity)

Enabled Disabled Disabled alarm

Enabled Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical Enabled alarm

Disabled Disabled Disabled alarm


Disabled Status, Warning, Minor, Major or Critical Disabled alarm

* In this context the Loss of Signal Alarm is called ethLanPhyLinkLoss.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 145


MNGT Port Configuration contextual area

The contextual area displays the configuration of the Ethernet port reserved to local and remote supervi-
sion of the equipment (management port).

Parameters
IP Address. IP address of the management port.

Net Mask. Mask for the network address definition.

Default Gateway. IP Address of the equipment used as Default Gateway from the management
port.

VLAN ID. VLAN reserved for the in band supervision (In-Band Management).

PHYSICAL INTERFACE
Port Alarm Report. Enabling state of the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port:
• Disabled. Alarm disabled: the detection of the alarm is not registered in the
equipment controller and, as consequence, is not communicated to a possible
management program: as the alarm had never occurred.
• Enabled. Alarm enabled: the detection of the alarm is registered in the equip-
ment controller and, if the forwarding of the relevant trap is enabled (see
Alarm Severity Config. contextual area), the alarm is communicated to the
management system and displayed in the current alarms and the history
alarms.
Admin State. Enabling state of the management port:
• Down. The port is not enabled to use: the port does not transmit/receive traf-
fic.
• Up. The port is enabled to use: the port transmits/receives traffic.
The port cannot transmit/receive traffic if the physical connection does not work.
Link Status. Status of the physical connection between the management port and a de-
vice in network:
• Up. The physical connection is active and ready for the traffic exchange.
• Down. The physical connection does not work: no physical connection has
been enabled or the established physical connection is not active or is defec-
tive.
Read only parameter.
Auto Neg. Activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port:
• Enabled. The autonegotiation is enabled. The port negotiates the transmission
speed with the peer at the other end of the link, in order to find the optimal
mutual connectivity. In autonegotiation, the Full Duplex modality without flow
control is proposed.
• Disabled. The autonegotiation is disabled. The port uses the transmission
speed configured in the Speed box, the flow control is disabled and the oper-
ation modality is Full Duplex.
Speed. Data transmission speed of the management port.
• 100 Mb. he data transmission speed through the port is 100 Mbit/s.
• 10 Mb. The data transmission speed through the port is 10 Mbit/s.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Store. Store the values into the equipment controller.


Restart. Execute the equipment software reset.
Retrieve. Read again the values set into the equipment controller.

Restart Auto Neg. Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port.

146 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


See also
MNGT Port Configuration (command)
Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port
Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway
Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision
Modify the enabling status of management port
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port
Modify the transmission speed of the management port
Enable/disable the Loss of Signal Alarm for the management port

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 147


Routing Table

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING When all pieces of equipment belongs to the same IP network and sending packets to other net-
works is not necessary, the Routing Table must not be necessarily defined because the network can man-
age its own internal traffic. Setting the Routing Table is necessary when equipment must send packets
between two different networks, then the traffic must be re-routed from a network to another one (routing
functionality of the equipment).

The Routing Table command manages the Routing Table of the equipment.

Operations
Verify the Routing Table of the equipment
Add an element to the Routing Table
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table

GUI
Routing Table contextual area

Verify the Routing Table of the equipment

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > Routing Table.


The Routing Table contextual area displays the Routing Table of the equipment.

Add an element to the Routing Table

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > Routing Table.


2. Press Add.

3. Into the Destination box, type the IP Address of the IP network or of the destination element.

4. Into the Subnet Mask box, type the mask for the destination IP network.

5. Set, in Next Hop box, the type of the next element by which the IP network or the destination element
can be reached:
• Interface. Local interface to the equipment, where the management traffic is routed via VLAN.
• Gateway. Network element which allows reaching a remote network.

6. If, in the step before, the selected value is:


• Interface, set the VLAN by which the destination network can be reached in the Interface box.
This element is mandatorily associated to the routing via VLAN.
• Gateway, set the IP address of the Gateway equipment for the destination network in the Gate-
way box.

7. Set, in the Distance box, the metric value of the destination (value between 1 and 255).

8. Press Apply and confirm.


The new element is inserted into the table.

148 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Base Band > DCN (LAN 3) > Routing Table.

2. Select the element of the Routing Table.


Multiple selections can be executed using the Ctrl or Shift keys.

3. Press Remove and confirm.


The system deletes the element into the Routing Table of the equipment.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 149


Routing Table contextual area

The contextual area shows the Routing Table currently used by the equipment.
Each row of the table corresponds to an item of the Routing Table.

Parameters
Destination. IP address of the IP network or of the destination element.

Gateway. IP address of the equipment that acts as Gateway.


Parameter not meaningful for the elements relevant to the equipment local interfaces (VLAN).
Subnet Mask. IP NetMask of the IP network or of the destination element.

Interface. Equipment local interface (VLAN) by which the IP network of the destination element
can be reached.
Parameter not meaningful for the elements which identify the Gateway.

Distance. Metric value of the destination.

Protocol. Modality of connection (direct or indirect) between the equipment and destination IP
network or element:
• Connected. The IP network or the element are directly connected to the equipment
interface. The IP network or the element are automatically inserted by the equipment
software according to their own IP address and NetMask.
• Static. The IP network or the element are not directly reachable from the equipment
interfaces. The IP network or the element have been manually inserted by the user
(static element).

Push-button
Apply. Not available in this context.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

Add. Add an element to the Routing Table.


Remove. Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table.

See also
Routing Table (command)

150 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


SYNCHRONISATION

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Synchronisation command manages the sources and the outputs of synchronism

Operations
T0 SYNCHRONISM

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism


Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism

SYNCHRONISM SOURCES

Verify/modify the management of synchronisation


Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without wait-
ing for the expiry of Wait Time
Verify/modify the management of SSM messages
Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s

GUI
Synchronisation contextual area

See also
Synchronisation (info)

Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism


User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The General tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Synchronisation.
The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:
• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equip-
ment internal reference - Internal Source).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 151


• Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
• Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are activating the forcing (selection of the Free Running or Hold Over option) a message
warns that you are executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

4. Confirm the operation.


The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Set the Hold Off Time parameter


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The Hold Off Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the
evaluated frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded).
At the end of the Hold Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input
source having a valid signal.

2. To change the parameter, set into the box a value between 300 and 1800 msec.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the WTR Time parameter


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The WTR Time parameter indicates the time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to
allow to the selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the se-
lection of T0 synchronism.
2. To change the parameter, set a value between 0 and 12 min.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation.
The LTI Set Time and LTI Reset Time parameters point out the threshold level of LTI alarm (Timing
Synk Loss Alarm):
• LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds with the presence
of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm itself.
• LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds without the
presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deactivates the alarm itself.

2. To change the parameter, set the new values in the specific boxes (allowed interval between 0 and 60
seconds).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

152 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the syn-
chronism
User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING This operation can be executed only if the Sync Quality management functionality is enabled
(see Equipment Features tab).

1. Select Synchronisation.
The parameter Status indicates the status of use of the source quality level as criterion to select the
synchronism:
• On. Use enabled.
• Off. Use disabled.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.


3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the management of synchronisation


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Before disabling the synchronisation management (all the sources Dis.), it is suggested to tem-
porarily force the status of synchronism T0 to Free Running (and then reset it to Locked) to avoid the oc-
currence of the alarms BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm and BASE BAND Sets Holdover Status (see Force
the status of the T0 synchronisation).

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the T0 tab.


The Priority column displays the management of synchronisation:
• If all the sources are disabled (value Dis.), the synchronisation management has been disabled
(the clocks are generated by the internal local reference).
• If at least one source is enabled, the synchronisation management is enabled.

3. To change the management to Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source.

Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources


User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the T0 tab.


The tab displays the status and configuration of the synchronism sources.

Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING You can enable the use of the source only if the Sync Eth functionality is enabled (see Equipment
Features tab).

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the T0 tab.


The Priority column shows the usage status of each source.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 153


3. To enable the use of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1 and 9 ac-
cording to the desired priority level to assign to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
To disable the use of the source, select the specific Priority box and then the Dis. value.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

4. Press Apply changes and confirm.


The message This Feature is not enabled! indicates that the Sync Eth functionality is not enabled.

Modify the use priority of a synchronism source


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the T0 tab.


The Priority column shows the priority level of each source.

3. To change the priority level of a source, select the specific Priority box and then a number between 1
and 9 according to the desired priority level to be assigned to the source (1: maximum priority, 9: min-
imum priority).
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the use of a synchronism source


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).


Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the T0 tab.


The Forced Switch column shows the forcing status of each source.
3. To change the forcing status of a source, select the specific Forced Switch box and then the option:
• Off, not to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
• On, to force the use of the source for the generation of the synchronism.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

4. Press Apply changes.


Only if you are activating the forcing a message warns that you are executing a forcing and displays
the current setting of timeout.
5. Confirm the operation.
The activation of the forcing activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and, then,
switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from the previous setting.

Set a synchronism source as preferential


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if the use of the synchronism source is active.

1. Select Synchronisation.

154 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


2. Select the T0 tab.
The Preferential Switch column shows if the source is used as preferential.

3. To change the preferential status of a source, select the specific Preferential Switch box and then the
option:
• Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism
sources.
• On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchronism sourc-
es and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used for the generation
of the synchronism.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source


User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the selection of the synchro-
nism, is enabled.

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the T0 tab.


For every synchronism source, the parameter Ovw Rx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality
level in reception; while the parameter Ovw Tx Qlty indicates the forcing status of the quality level in
transmission.

3. To change the parameters, select the Ovw Rx Qlty or Ovw Tx Qlty box and than the option:
• none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken from the
SSM messages i enabled (see Quality of synchronism source).
• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the param-
eters of the primary reference clock.
• SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the transit synchronism units.
• SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the pa-
rameters of the local synchronism units.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines the param-
eters of the equipment clock.
• DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism


without waiting for the expiry of Wait Time
User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the T0 tab.

3. Select the source, with valid signal, whose availability you wish to restore for the generation of T0 syn-
chronism.
4. Press Wtr Clear and confirm.
The source is immediately used for the generation of T0 synchronism. The period Wtr Time is consid-
ered elapsed.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 155


Verify/modify the management of SSM messages
User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

WARNING Operation available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism,
is enabled.

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the LAN SSM tab.


The tab shows the configuration parameters and the enabling status of the SSM messages (Synchro-
nization Status Message) for the LAN interfaces.

3. To change the management of the SSM messages, in the SSM Enable box in corresponding of the
wished LAN, select the option:
• On. The SSM messages are managed by the LAN.
• Off. The messages are not managed.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.
4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s


User Profile | Verify: Monitor, Read & Write. Modify: Station Operator, System

WARNING Operation available only for equipment with LANs with electrical interface.
Operation available only for the LAN’s not selected as synchronisation sources and for the LAN’s selected
as synchronisation sources which the use of SSM messages is not active for. When one LAN is selected as
synchronisation source and the use of SSM messages is active for it, the role of the line synchronism is
dynamically managed by the system.

1. Select Synchronisation.

2. Select the 1000Base-T Role tab.


The tab shows the configuration parameters and the line synchronism direction for the LAN with elec-
trical interface.

3. To modify the direction of a LAN, select the relevant box in the Role column and then one of the fol-
lowing option:
• Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop Time).
• Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
• Auto. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically managed
by SSM independently from the setting of the port parameters.
Pressing Revert changes cancels all the changes executed.

4. Press Apply changes and confirm.

156 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Synchronisation contextual area

The contextual area displays status and configuration of the sources and the outputs of synchronism.

Tabs
General tab. Configuration and alarms status of the T0 synchronism.
T0 tab. Configuration and status of the synchronism sources.
LAN SSM tab. Enabling status of the SSM messages for the traffic LAN’s.
1000Base-T Role tab. Role of the LAN synchronism sources.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Synchronisation (command)
Synchronisation (info)

General tab

The tab displays the configuration parameters and the alarms status of the T0 synchronism.

Parameters
ALARMS
Alarms status of the T0 synchronism. The colour of each box displays the status of the
specific alarm:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the
Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.
• Grey. Alarm deactivated.
SETTING
Status Control. Status of T0 synchronism:
• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is gener-
ated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
• Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
• Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

TIME
Hold Off Time. Time (expressed in ms) during which the system keeps the evaluated
frequency of an invalid synchronism source (absent or degraded). At the end of the Hold
Off time, the invalid source will be rejected and it will be used the first input source having
a valid signal.
WTR Time. Time (expressed in minutes) that has to pass in such a way to allow to the
selected input source having a valid signal to be really used within the process for the
selection of T0 synchronism.
LTI Set Time / LTI Reset Time. Threshold level of LTI alarm (TimingSynkLossAlarm):
• LTI Set Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive seconds
with the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system activates the alarm
itself.
• LTI Reset Time. Threshold value - expressed as number of consecutive sec-
onds without the presence of the LTI alarm - over which the system deacti-
vates the alarm itself.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 157


QUALITY
Current. Current quality level of the T0 synchronism:
• none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that
taken from the SSM messages i enabled (see Quality of synchronism source).
• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the primary reference clock.
• SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
• SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the local synchronism units.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that
defines the parameters of the equipment clock.
• DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.
Generally the quality of T0 synchronism corresponds to the quality of the source from
which T0 is retrieved.
Status. Status of use of the source quality level as criterion for the selection of the syn-
chronism:
• On. Use enabled.
• Off. Use not enabled.

See also
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Set the Hold Off Time parameter
Set the WTR Time parameter
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism

T0 tab

The tab displays the Configuration and status of the synchronism T0.
Every row of the table corresponds to one source.

Parameters
Name. Synchronism source name:
• TE LAN-1. First source extracted from LAN-1 of Ethernet Switch.
• TE LAN-2. Second source extracted from LAN-2 of Ethernet Switch.
• T2 RADIO. Source extracted from the Radio 1A.
• Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (25MHz STRATUM 3e).

Priority. Status and priority use of the source:


• Dis. The synchronism source is not used.
• <1 ÷ 9>. The synchronism source is enabled and has a priority level pointed out by
the number (1: maximum priority, 9: minimum priority).
WARNING If all the sources are disabled, the synchronisation management is disabled.

Forced Switch. Forced use of the source:


• Off. The source has not been manually forced for the generation of the T0 synchro-
nism.
• On <light blue box>. The source has been manually forced for the generation of the
T0 synchronism (Manual Operation).

Preferential Switch. Status of preferential usage of the source:


• Off. The synchronism source is not preferential as opposed to the other enabled syn-
chronism sources.

158 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


• On. The synchronism source is preferential as opposed to the other enabled synchro-
nism sources and (in absence of alarms causing its degrade or forced sources) is used
for the generation of the synchronism.

Sync Loss / Sync Drift. Respectively status of the alarm Timing Synk Loss Alarm and Timing
Synk Drift Alarm relevant to the source. The colour of each box displays the status of the specific
alarm:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the Criti-
cal, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity.
• Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Rx Quality. Source quality level in reception:


• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.
• SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
• SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.
• DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.
• UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.
The wording (ovw) indicates that the quality level in reception is forced by the operator.

Tx Quality. Source quality level in transmission.


The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol
calculation. The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter.

Ovw Rx Qlty. Forcing status of the source quality level in reception:


• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.
• SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
• SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.
• DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.
• UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown
• none. The quality of the synchronism source is not forced. The quality is that taken
from the SSM messages i enabled (see Quality of synchronism source).

Ovw Tx Qlty. Forcing status of the quality level in transmission of the source.
The displayed values are the same described for the Ovw Rx Qlty parameter.

The Rx Quality, Tx Quality, Ovw Rx Qlty and Ovw Tx Qlty parameters are present only if the use of
the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is enabled.

The source of synchronism whose row has red border indicates the source which the equipment ex-
tracts the synchronization T0 from.
When the source, which the synchronization is extracted from, changes, the row relevant to the new
source will become yellow and will blink before becoming of color sky-blue with red border.

Push-button
Refresh. Update the context.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.
Wtr clear. Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without
waiting for the expiry of Wait Time.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 159


See also
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source
Force the use of a synchronism source
Set a synchronism source as preferential
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source

LAN SSM tab

WARNING Tab available only if the use of the quality, as criterion for the choice of the synchronism, is en-
abled.

The tab shows the enabling status of the SSM messages for the traffic LAN’s.

Parameters
Port. Identifier of the port. The value ID is the combination of the slot number and the port
number (slot number/port number).

Description. Name of the port.


• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Media. Type of interface:
• Copper. Ethernet port with electrical interface.
• Fiber. Ethernet port with optical interface.
• ---. Parameter not meaningful for the port (for example, Radio port).
SSM Enable. Management status of the SSM messages for the equipment LAN’s:
• On. The SSM messages are managed by the LAN.
• Off. The messages are not managed.

Rx Quality. Source quality level in reception:


• PRC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the primary reference clock.
• SSUT. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the transit synchronism units.
• SSUL. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the local synchronism units.
• SEC. The source quality complies with the ITU-T G.781/G.8264 Recom. that defines
the parameters of the equipment clock.
• DNU. The source has not to be used for the synchronization.
• UNK. The quality level is unavailable or unknown.
Tx Quality. Source quality level in transmission.
The quality level in transmission of the synchronism source in input is the result of the protocol
calculation. The displayed values are the same described for the Rx Quality parameter.

Rx Pkts. Number of packets received on the corresponding port.

Tx Pkts. Number of packets transmitted by the corresponding port.

Rx Dropped Packets. Number of packets dropped among those received on the corresponding
port.

Rx Errored Packets. Number of errored packets among those received on the corresponding
port.

160 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Push-button
Refresh. Update the context.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.

See also
Verify/modify the management of SSM messages

1000Base-T Role tab

WARNING Tab available only for equipment with LANs with electrical interface.
Parameters meaningful for the LAN’s not selected as synchronisation sources and for the LAN’s selected as
synchronisation sources which the use of SSM messages is not active for. When one LAN is selected as
synchronisation source and the use of SSM messages is active for it, the role of the line synchronism is
dynamically managed by the system.

The tab displays the direction of the line synchronism for the LAN’s with electrical interface.

Parameters
Port. Identifier of the port. Identifier of the port. The value ID is the combination of the slot
number and the port number (slot number/port number).

Description. Name of the port:


• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric).

Media. Type of interface:


• Copper. Ethernet port with electrical interface.
Role. Line synchronism direction for the LAN’s with electrical interface displayed in the table:
• Slave. The line synchronism is generated with the clock retrieved from the line (Loop
Time).
• Master. The line synchronism is generated starting from the local clock.
• Auto. The assignment of role Master or Slave of the line synchronism is automatically
managed by SSM independently from the setting of the port parameters.

Push-button
Refresh. Update the context.
Apply changes. Confirm the changes.
Revert changes. Cancel the changes not confirmed yet.

See also
Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 161


Synchronisation (info)

Management of synchronisation
Synchronism sources
Enabling of the synchronism sources
Priority of the synchronism source
Quality of synchronism source
Forcing of a synchronism source
Function of preferential synchronism source
Internal synchronism T0

See also
Synchronisation (command)
Synchronisation contextual area

Management of synchronisation

ALFOplus80HD equipment can be configured to operate with synchronisation enabled or disabled.


When the synchronisation is disable, the synchronisation is not managed: the clocks are generated by the
local internal reference.
When the synchronisation is enabled, the synchronism source, enabled with the highest priority, is used
to synchronise the equipment (if a forcing or a preferential is not active).
The user can enable or disable the management of synchronisation as he wishes (see Verify/modify the
management of synchronisation).

WARNING You can enable the management of synchronization only if the Sync Eth functionality is enabled
(see Equipment Features tab).

Synchronism sources

The equipment has more synchronism sources:


TE LAN-1. Source extracted from the LAN-1 of Ethernet Switch.
TE LAN-2. Source extracted from the LAN-2 of Ethernet Switch.
T2 RADIO. Source extracted from the Radio 1A.
Internal. Source extracted from an its own internal reference (25MHz STRATUM 3e).

Enabling of the synchronism sources

A synchronism source, in order to be used, must be enabled by the user (see Enable/disable the use of a
synchronism source).

WARNING You can enable the use of the source only if the Sync Eth functionality is enabled (see Equipment
Features tab).

162 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Priority of the synchronism source

A priority level can be associated to every synchronism source (see Modify the use priority of a synchronism
source).

The source with the highest priority level and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize the equipment
(if a forcing or a preferential source is not active).

The priority level of the synchronism source is pointed out by a number between 1 and 9, where 1 indicates
the highest priority and 9 the lowest one.

Generally the equipment takes the synchronism from the source with the highest priority level: if this
source is missing or is degraded, the synchronism is taken from the source with priority level immediately
lower.

When the source with highest priority level returns to be valid, the equipment after the WTR time will au-
tomatically start to use it to take the synchronism. If all the synchronism sources (set by the user) become
unavailable, the equipment automatically takes the synchronism from its own internal reference.

The degradation of the signal is caused by the presence of, at least, one of the following conditions:
• The source is not physically present.
• The difference between the source frequency and the internal reference source (STRATUM 3e)
is greater than ± 7 ppm.

If two or more sources with the same priority are activated, these sources will be inserted into a circular
and not Revertive list.

Quality of synchronism source

Every synchronism source is characterized by a quality level.


When the use of quality is enabled, it concurs in the selection of the source to use for the synchronisation
in the following way: the source with higher quality level, and whose signal is valid, is used to synchronize
the equipment (if a forcing is not active).

The quality level of one source is contained in the Synchronisation Status Messages (SSM). These messag-
es are periodically transmitted; the absence of a message is considered as condition of failure of the syn-
chronisation mechanism.
The availability quality levels, from higher to lower level, are listed here below:
• PRC (Primary Reference Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the primary reference
clock.
• SSUT (Synchronisation Supply Unit Transit). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-
T G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the
transit synchronism units.
• SSUL (Synchronisation Supply Unit Local). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T
G.781 with extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the syn-
chronism local units.
• SEC (SDH Equipment Clock). The source quality is in compliance with Recc. ITU-T G.781 with
extension to G.8264 for Ethernet streams which defines the parameters of the equipment clock.

Depending on the type of synchronism source, the modality used to insert and extract the SSM messages
changes as pointed out here below.

Synchronism sources TE LAN-1 and TE LAN-2 (Ethernet)


For the synchronism sources TE LAN-1 and TE LAN-2, the quality management depends on the
LAN interface and by the management of the SSM messages as indicated here below.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 163


Type of LAN’s on SSM messages Line synchronism Quality management Quality management
the equipment management direction (role) * in input (Rx) in output (Tx)

LAN with electrical Enable Role dynamically Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or
interface managed by the tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from
system packet the considered LAN) is in-
serted in the transmitted
packet.

Disable Role set by Quality value is DNU SSM messages are not
operator ** transmitted

LAN with optical Enable - Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or
interface tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from
packet the considered LAN) is in-
serted in the transmitted
packet.
Disable - Quality value is DNU SSM messages are not
transmitted

* Parameter meaningful only for LAN with 1000Base-T electrical interface.


** See Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s

Synchronism sources Radio


For the synchronism source Radio, the quality management depends on the management of the
SSM messages as indicated here below.

Synchronism SSM messages Quality management Quality management


sources management in input (Rx) in output (Tx)

Radio Enable Quality value (SSM) is ex- The quality value of T0 or


tracted from the received DNU (if T0 is derived from
packet the considered LAN) is in-
serted in the transmitted
packet.

Disable Quality value is DNU SSM messages are not


transmitted

WEB LCT
As regards the quality management via the WEB LCT page, it is possible:
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source
Verify/modify the management of SSM messages
Verify/modify the line synchronism direction of the LAN’s

WARNING The quality of the synchronism sources is a feature subjected to enabling (Sync quality man-
agement equipment feature).
If this feature is not enabled, all the parameters relevant to the quality management will not be available
(see Verify the equipment feature).

Forcing of a synchronism source

This function foresees the user can force the selection of one synchronism source (see Force the use of a
synchronism source).

This forcing is made without considering the status and the priority of the source.

This function must not be used for the normal operation of the synchronism. It is a maintenance operation
and remains active until the user disables it or the Timeout period of the manual operations expires (if set).

164 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Function of preferential synchronism source

This function foresees the choice of a source to use as preferential among those enabled (see Set a syn-
chronism source as preferential).

When the function of preferential source is not active, the internal synchronism is taken from the enabled
source with highest priority.

When the function of preferential source is activated for a source, this source will be used (in absence of
alarms causing its degradation or forced sources) to take the internal synchronism independently from its
priority level.

This condition is maintained until when the user disables the function of preferential source or the source
signal becomes degraded.

Internal synchronism T0

The synchronism source, which the internal synchronism T0 is extracted from, is determined by the SETS
of the equipment according to the following order of criteria:
• Status of the source (enabled/disabled)
• Forcing of the source
• Status of the signal (valid/degraded)
• Preferential source
• Source priority

The internal synchronism T0 can assume one of the following statuses:


• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equip-
ment internal reference - Internal Source).
• Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
• Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

The user can force the status of the internal synchronism T0 (see Force the status of the T0 synchronisa-
tion).
The forcing of the status Hold Over or Free Running is not the normal operation of the synchronism T0.
These forcings are maintenance operations and remain active until when the user does not disable them
or the Timeout period of the manual operation expires (if set).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 165


RADIO BRANCH

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Radio Branch command manages the radio parameters.

Operations
Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq)
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq)
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx)
Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every
ACM profile

GUI
Radio Branch contextual area

Verify/modify the duplex frequency


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio Branch.


The Dplx Freq parameter indicates the duplex frequency (MHz) of the equipped radio.
The displayed value is always positive, independently from the position of the transmission frequency
with respect to the receiving frequency.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished value.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Setting the parameter does NOT automatically modify even the RF frequency of remote equip-
ment.
Before setting the transmission frequency of the equipment, set the duplex frequency value.

1. Select Radio Branch.


The Tx Freq parameter indicates the transmission frequency of the equipment.

2. To change the parameter, it is possible to:


• Set in the Tx Freq box the wished frequency value using the fine tuning step (typically 125 KHz).
• Press Freq. Table to display the table of the frequencies (see ITU-R F2006). Select the wished
value and press Ok. If this value was not present in the table, the radio can be however tuned
with fine tuning.

166 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Push-button available only if the channelling file has been previously loaded on the equipment.
In case of fine-step file (less than 1 MHz), the frequency table does not contain any value to
avoid reading not meaningful values.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Deactivating the modulation (option On) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
Before deactivating the modulation, configure the transmitter power to the minimum value.

1. Select Radio Branch.


The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier:
• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.

2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are deactivating the modulation (selection of the On option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

4. Confirm the operation.


The modulation deactivation of the carrier activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched
off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the previous setting.

Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Switching the transmitter off (option Off) is a maintenance operation (MAN. OP).
The permanent switch-off of the transmitter (option Permanent Off) is NOT a maintenance operation, so
the selection of this value is not subjected to the Timeout of MAN OP and the setting is not lost after a
controller restart.

1. Select Radio Branch.


The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:
• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.
• Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.
2. To change the parameter, select the wished option.

3. Press Apply.
Only if you are switching off the transmitter (selection of the Off option) a message warns that you are
executing a forcing and displays the current setting of timeout.

4. Confirm the operation.


The turning off of the transmitter activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is switched off and,
then, switched on, the transmitter is on, independently from the previous setting.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 167


Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx)
User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio Branch.


The Prx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power received by the equipment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx
change).

2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx)


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio Branch.


The Ptx: <current value> dB parameter indicates the resolution used to communicate the changes of
the power transmitted by the equipment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx
change).

2. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio Branch.

2. Select the ODU Powers tab.


The Tx Power Control area indicates the functioning status of the ATPC:
• Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disable).
In this condition, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (Max Ptx cursor).
• Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
In this condition, the transmitted power is automatically adjusted according to the level of the
signal at reception.
The thresholds of the ATPC device can be configured (see Verify/modify the threshold of the
ATPC device). Then, it is possible to adjust the maximum output power (see Verify/modify the
maximum output power value at the transmitter).
3. To change the parameter, select the wished option.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio Branch.

2. Select the ODU Powers tab.


The Max Ptx: <current value> dBm parameter indicates the maximum output power value at the trans-
mitter (Ptx nominal value).

3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. If you wish to set the maximum avail-
able value of range, activate the box ATPC Full Range.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

168 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation
User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power Control
parameter - Automatic value).

1. Select Radio Branch.

2. Select the ODU Powers tab.


The ATPC Regulation: <current value> dB parameter indicates the range of the ATPC regulation (ex-
pressed in dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the upper
limit of the range.

3. To change the parameter, move the cursor on the wished value. If you wish to set the maximum avail-
able value of range, activate the box ATPC Full Range.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device


User Profile | Verify: Read Only, Maint. Modify: Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Radio Branch.


2. Select the ODU Powers tab.
In the ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx area the threshold of the ATPC is pointed out:
• High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set threshold
value.
• Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted power
when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set threshold val-
ue.

3. To change the threshold move the High and/or Low cursor to the wished value.

4. Press Apply and confirm.

Display the table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/


reception for every ACM profile
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

1. Select Radio Branch.

2. Select the ODU Powers tab.


In the Current ATPC Power area the table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM
profile is displayed.
Every table row corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
• Active Modulation. ACM profile
• Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the transmitter
• RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.

Press Refresh to update the table.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 169


Radio Branch contextual area

The contextual area displays the radio parameters.

Tabs
ODU Settings tab. Radio parameters: RF channel, power resolution, transmitter operating status
and carrier modulation
ODU Powers tab. Radio parameters: ATPC.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Radio Branch (command)

ODU Settings tab

The tab displays the radio parameters (RF channel, measurements resolutions, carrier only and Tx trans-
mitter).

Parameters
TX FREQUENCY SELECTOR
Tx Freq. Frequency of the radio transmission. The wording:
• Must be Set indicates that for the radio a channel is not planned.
• HW Fail indicates a hardware problem.
Dplx Freq. Frequency of duplex.
MEASUREMENTS RESOLUTION
Ptx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power transmitted by the equip-
ment (Ptx) to a possible external management program (trap Ptx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated Ptx value
corresponds to 10 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the changing of
the transmitted power when the Ptx gets a value < 8 or > 12.
Prx. Resolution used to communicate the changes of the power received by the equip-
ment (Prx) to a possible external management program (trap Prx change).
For instance, if the operator sets a resolution of 2 dB and the last communicated PRx val-
ue corresponds to -70 dBm, the equipment will communicate to the program the chang-
ing of the transmitted power when the PRx gets a value <-72 or > -68.

Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter:


• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.
• Permanent Off. The transmitter is turned off in permanent mode.

Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier:


• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.

Push-button
Freq. Table. Display the table of the preferential frequencies.

170 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


See also
Verify/modify the duplex frequency (Dplx Freq)
Verify/modify the frequency which the equipment transmitter is tuned on (Tx Freq)
Verify/modify the modulation status of the RF carrier (Carrier Only)
Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter (Tx Transmitter)
Verify/modify the resolution of the received power (Prx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)
Verify/modify the resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx) (Measurements Resolutions)

ODU Powers tab

The tab displays the radio parameters (ATPC).

Parameters
TX POWER CONTROL
Operating status of the ATPC device:
• Manual. The ATPC device is in manual functioning mode (ATPC function disa-
ble).
• Automatic. The ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode.
Max Ptx <current value> dBm. Maximum output power value at the transmitter. The
parameter affects the ATPC device as when it is in manual functioning mode as in auto-
matic one.
ATPC Regulation <current value> dB. Range of the ATPC regulation (expressed in
dB) with respect to the current value of maximum Tx output, that is intended as the up-
per limit of the range.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power
Control parameter - Automatic value) and the box ATPC Full Range is not active.
ATPC Full Range. The active box ( ) indicates that the ATPC device operates at the
maximum limit of the range; the inactive box indicates that the maximum limit of the
ATPC device is indicated by the parameter ATPC Regulation.
Parameter available only if the ATPC device is in automatic functioning mode (Tx Power
Control parameter - Automatic value).

ATPC THRESHOLDS ON LOCAL PRX


High: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to decrease the transmitted
power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or higher than the set
threshold value
Low: <current value> dBm. Threshold of the ATPC device to increase the transmitted
power when the received field from the local equipment is equal to or lower than the set
threshold value.

CURRENT ATPC POWER


The table resuming the power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile. Every table row
corresponds to a profile. For every profile is displayed in the column:
Active Modulation. ACM profile.
Tx Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in output from the trans-
mitter
RX Power. Minimum power (Min) and maximum power (Max) in input to the receiver.
Table available only if the adaptive modulation is enabled.

Push-button
Refresh. Update the table.

See also
Verify/modify the functioning status of the ATPC (Tx Power Control)
Verify/modify the maximum output power value at the transmitter (Max Ptx)
Verify/modify the range of the ATPC regulation (ATPC Regulation)
Verify/modify the threshold of the ATPC device (ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 171


MAINTENANCE

S/N Meas. It displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N).


Radio BER. It manages the measure of Radio BER value.
Radio Loop. It manages the radio loops.
Manual Operations. It manages the manual operations.
RMON. It manages the count of the RMon statistics.

172 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


S/N Meas
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The S/N Meas command displays the measure of the signal/noise ratio (S/N), which allows evaluating the
quality of the radio communication channel.

Operations
Verify the value of the S/N measure
Update the value of the S/N measure

GUI
S/N Meas. contextual area

Verify the value of the S/N measure

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.


The S/N Meas. contextual area displays the value of the signal/noise ratio.

Update the value of the S/N measure

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > S/N Meas.


The S/N parameter indicates the value of the signal/noise ratio.
2. Press Refresh to update the value.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 173


S/N Meas. contextual area

The contextual area shows the value of the S/N measure.

Parameters
S/N. Value of the signal/noise ratio.
The measure is always in progress.

Push-button
Refresh. Update the value of the S/N measure
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
S/N Meas (command)

174 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Radio BER
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Radio BER command allows verifying the quality of the signal received by the equipment.

Operations
Verify the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure
Activate the measure (BER and error count)
Deactivate the measure (BER and error count)

GUI
Radio BER contextual area

Verify the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio BER.


The Radio BER contextual area displays the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER
measure.

Activate the measure (BER and error count)

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The operation is traffic affecting.


Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP).

1. Select Maintenance > Radio BER.


2. Select the On option (Test Mode parameter).

3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.

4. Confirm the operation.


The activation of measure activates the MAN. OP. alarm. If the equipment is switched off and then
switched on again, the measure is inactive independently from the previous setting.

5. Press Start Measure and confirm.


To restart the measure (reset of BER and number of errors), press Start Measure and confirming.

Deactivate the measure (BER and error count)

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio BER.

2. Select the Off option (Test Mode parameter).

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 175


Radio BER contextual area

The contextual area shows the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure.

Parameters
GENERAL
BER. Bit Error Rate: ratio between the number of received errored bits and the number
of total received bits. BER value is dynamically updated during the measure.
Errors. Number of errors detected from the start of the measure.
Elapsed Time. Time (expressed in seconds) range after the measure active.
Synch Loss events. Number of times that the Sync Loss Alarm activated from the start
of the measure.
Sync Loss Alarm. Status of Synch Loss alarm. The colour of the box represents the
alarm status and severity:
• Red, Orange, Yellow, Light blue. Alarm activated coupled respectively with the
Critical, Major, Minor, Warning severity.
• Green. Alarm activated coupled with the Status severity level.
• Grey. Alarm deactivated.

Test Mode. Activation status of the measure:


• On. The Radio BER measure is active.
• Off. The Radio BER measure is deactivated.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.
Start Measure. Start o restart the measure.

See also
Radio BER (command)
Activate the measure (BER and error count)
Deactivate the measure (BER and error count)

176 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Radio Loop
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Radio Loop command manages the radio loops.

Operations
Verify the radio loops status
Activate a radio loop
Deactivate a radio loop

GUI
Radio Loop contextual area

Verify the radio loops status

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.


The Radio Loop contextual area displays the current status of the radio loops.

Activate a radio loop

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The activation of a radio loop affects the traffic.


The activation of the radio loop I/Q Loop (Traffic not squelched) could cause the loss of supervision.
Operation of maintenance (MAN. OP)
Before activating a loop, it is suggested to verify that the timeout of the manual operations is set. If the
timeout is not active, the loop will be active until its deactivation by the user, the switch-off/switch-on of
the equipment or the equipment reset.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.

2. Select the option relevant to the loop that you want to activate.
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables
the preceding one.

3. Press Apply.
A message warns that you are executing a forcing and shows the current setting of timeout.

4. Confirm the operation.


The activation of a loop activates the MAN. OP alarm. If the equipment is turned off and then turned
on again, the loop results deactivated without taking into account the preceding setting.

Deactivate a radio loop

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Radio Loop.

2. Select the Loop OFF option.

3. Press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 177


Radio Loop contextual area

The contextual area shows the current status of the radio loops.

Parameters
Loop. Status of the loops:
• Loop OFF. No loop active.
• I/Q Loop (Traffic squelched). Radio loop executed before the modulation and RF am-
plification block: traffic is not looped.
• I/Q Loop (Traffic not squelched). Radio loop executed before the modulation and RF
amplification block: traffic is looped.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Radio Loop (command)
Activate a radio loop
Deactivate a radio loop

178 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Manual Operations
User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Manual Operations command manages the available maintenance operations (MAN OP) with the ex-
ception of the BER measure.

Operations
Verify the manual operations status
Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter
Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier
Activate/deactivate a radio loop
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Force the use of a synchronism source

GUI
Manual Operations contextual area

Verify the manual operations status

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations.


The Manual Operations contextual area displays the current status of the available maintenance oper-
ations with the exception of the BER measure.
For this operation see Verify the status and the configuration parameters of Radio BER measure.

Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Switching the transmitter off is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout
setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the Tx is on, independently from the previous set-
ting.
The permanent turn-off of the transmitter is not a maintenance operation, so the operation is not available
in this context. To execute it see Verify/modify the operation of the transmitter.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations.


The Tx Transmitter parameter indicates the operation of the transmitter:
• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.

2. To turn-off the transmitter select the Off option, press Apply and confirm.

3. To turn-on the transmitter select the On option, press Apply and confirm.

Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Deactivating the modulation of the RF carrier is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify
the timeout setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 179


If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the modulation is active independently from the
previous setting.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations.


The Carrier Only parameter indicates the modulation status of the RF carrier:
• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.

2. To disable the modulation of the RF carrier select the On value, press Apply and confirm
3. To enable the modulation of the RF carrier select the Off value, press Apply and confirm

Activate/deactivate a radio loop

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The activation of a loop is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout setting
(see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the loop is deactive independently from the pre-
vious setting.
The activation of a radio loop affects the traffic.
The activation of the radio loop I/Q Loop (Traffic not squelched) could cause the loss of supervision.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations.


The Loop parameter indicates the status of the radio loops:
• Loop OFF. No loop active.
• I/Q Loop (Traffic squelched). Radio loop executed before the modulation and RF amplification
block: traffic is not looped.
• I/Q Loop (Traffic not squelched). Radio loop executed before the modulation and RF amplifica-
tion block: traffic is looped.
2. To activate a loop select the value relevant to the wished loop, press Apply and confirm
It is not possible to preset more loops at the same time as the choice of a option automatically disables
the preceding one.
3. To deactivate the loop select the Loop OFF value, press Apply and confirm.

Force the status of the T0 synchronisation

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The activation of the forcing is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout
setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from
the previous setting.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations.


The Status Control parameter indicates the status of T0 synchronism:
• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is generated by the equip-
ment internal reference - Internal Source).
• Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
• Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.

2. To force the status of the T0 synchronisation select the Free Running or Hold Over value, press Apply
and confirm.

3. To remove the forcing select the Locked option, press Apply and confirm.

180 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Force the use of a synchronism source

User Profile | Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The activation of the forcing is a MAN OP. Before executing the operation, verify the timeout
setting (see Verify/modify the manual operation timeout).
If the equipment is switched off and, then, switched on, the forcing results inactive, independently from
the previous setting.

1. Select Maintenance > Manual Operations.


The Forced Switch parameter indicates the forced use of a synchronism source for the generation of
the T0 synchronism:
• Off. No source has been forced.
• TE LAN-1. The use of the source derived from LAN-1 is forced.
• TE LAN-2. The use of the source derived from LAN-2 is forced.
• T2 RADIO. The use of the source derived from Radio 1A is forced.

2. To force a source select the specific option, press Apply and confirm.

3. To remove the forcing select the Off option, press Apply and confirm.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 181


Manual Operations contextual area

The contextual area shows the current status of the available maintenance operations (MAN OP) with the
exception of the BER measure.

Press to compress a group. Press to expand a group.

Parameters
ODU SETTINGS
Tx Transmitter. Operating status of the transmitter:
• On. The transmitter is turned on.
• Off. The transmitter is turned off.
Carrier Only. Modulation status of the RF carrier:
• On. The carrier is not modulated.
• Off. The carrier is modulated.
RADIO LOOP
Loop. Status of the radio loops:
• Loop OFF. No loop active.
• I/Q Loop (Traffic squelched). Radio loop executed before the modulation and
RF amplification block: traffic is not looped.
• I/Q Loop (Traffic not squelched). Radio loop executed before the modulation
and RF amplification block: traffic is looped.

SYNCHRONISATION
Status Control. Status of T0 synchronism:
• Free Running. The status of Free Running is forced (synchronism T0 is gener-
ated by the equipment internal reference - Internal Source).
• Hold Over. The status of Hold Over is forced.
• Locked. The synchronism is locked to an external source.
Forced Switch. Forced use of a synchronism source for the generation of the T0 syn-
chronism:
• Off. No source has been forced.
• TE LAN-1. The use of the source derived from LAN-1 is forced.
• TE LAN-2. The use of the source derived from LAN-2 is forced.
• T2 RADIO. The use of the source derived from Radio 1A is forced.

Push-button
Apply. Confirm the changes.
Refresh. Update the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Manual Operations (command)
Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter
Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier
Activate/deactivate a radio loop
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation
Force the use of a synchronism source

182 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


RMON

Settings. It manages the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics and History).
Ethernet Statistics. It displays the current values of RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port).
Ethernet Service Statistics. It displays the current values of RMon statistic counters (RMon instances
Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID).
Ethernet History. It displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instances per Port).
Ethernet Service History. It displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instances Port & Priority
and Port & C-VID/S-VID).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 183


Settings

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The Settings command manages the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics and History).

Operations
Verify the count status of the RMon statistics
Activate the count of the RMon statistics
Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics

STATISTICS GROUP

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the RMon sta-
tistics
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the RMon
statistics
HISTORY GROUP

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the history of
the RMON statistics
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the history
of the RMON statistics

GUI
Settings contextual area

See also
RMon standard (info)

Verify the count status of the RMon statistics

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.


The parameter RMON Status shows the status of the count of the RMon statistics and the history of the
RMon statistics for the all enabled instances:
• Enabled. The count is active.
• Disabled. The count is not active.

Activate the count of the RMon statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance has been set.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Set, in RMON Status box, the value Enabled and confirm.


The count of the RMon statistics is activated for the instances present in the Ethernet Statistics tab,
Ethernet History tab, Ethernet Service Statistics tab and Ethernet Service History tab.

184 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The operation resets the current values of RMON statistic counters (see Ethernet Statistics and
Ethernet Service Statistics) and the RMon statistic history (see Ethernet History and Ethernet Service His-
tory).

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Set, in RMON Status box, the value Disabled and confirm.


The count of the RMon statistics is interrupted for the instances present in the Ethernet Statistics tab,
Ethernet History tab, Ethernet Service Statistics tab and Ethernet Service History tab.

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The recommended maximum total number of instances is 40.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. In the Ethernet Statistics tab, press Add.

3. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of RMon
statistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in list or in the tab Ethernet Service Statistics tab.

4. Set, in the Data source box, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the RMon statistics
for the specific instance.
The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
The list will display only the ports not associated yet to any RMon per Port instance.

5. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the instance (alphanumeric
string of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.

6. Press Apply.
The instance is added to the list.
The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for
the count of the RMon statistics).

Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. In the Ethernet Statistics tab, select the instance you wish to delete.
An instance per Port cannot be deleted if an instance associated to the same Ethernet port is present
in the Ethernet History tab. To delete it, it is first necessary to remove the instance per Port present in
the tab Ethernet History.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 185


3. Press Remove and confirm.
The instance is deleted from the list.

Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the RMon statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The recommended maximum total number of instances is 40.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Select the Ethernet Service Statistics tab.

3. Press Add.

4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the port in the database table of RMon sta-
tistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in the Ethernet Statistics tab.

5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable to the count of RMon statistics for
the specific instance.
The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.

6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the port (alphanumeric string
of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.

7. Set, in the box Select Service, the criterion you wish to enable to filter the traffic:
• Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output must have to be
counted by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority).
• SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output must have to be counted
by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & C-VID/S-VID).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge
modality.
• CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output must have to be
counted by the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & C-VID/S-VID).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.

8. Set, in the box Priority, the priority value which the packet in input/output from the port must have to
be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful only if the value Priority is present in the box Select Service.
9. Set, in the box SVID, the S-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
by the RMon statistics.
The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab).
Parameter available and meaningful only if the value SVID is present in the box Select Service.

10.Set, in the box CVID, the C-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
by the RMon statistics.
The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab).
Parameter available and meaningful only if the value CVID is present in the box Select Service.

11.Press Apply.
The instance is added to the list.
The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority
or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the RMon statistics).

186 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the RMon statis-
tics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Select the Ethernet Service Statistics tab.


3. Select the instance you wish to delete.
An instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID cannot be deleted if an instance associated to the
same criteria (Ethernet port and Priority or C-VID/S-VID) is present in the Ethernet Service History tab.
In order to delete it, it is first necessary to delete the corresponding instance Port & Priority or Port &
C-VID/S-VID present in the tab Ethernet Service History.

4. Press Remove and confirm.


The instance is deleted from the list.

Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The recommended maximum total number of instances is 40.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Select the Ethernet History tab.

3. Press Add.
4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of history
of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in the Ethernet Service History tab.

5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the history of the
RMon statistics for the specific instance.
The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.

6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the RMon instance (alphanu-
meric string of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.

7. Set, in Buckets Requested, the total number of samples to collect (value between 1 and 240).
The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the
old one.
The recommended maximum value of bucket for all the instances is 2400.
8. Set, in the Interval (s) box, the sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history (value
between 1 and 3600 seconds).
The minimum recommended value is 60 seconds.
9. Press Apply.
The message Ethernet Statistics for <port name> are not present, they will be created automatically?
indicates that, for the Ethernet port selected at step 5, there is not an analogous instance in the Ether-
net Statistics tab. Press OK to continue the operation.
The instance is added to the list.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 187


The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for
the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
In the Ethernet Statistics tab, an instance per Port is automatically created with the following charac-
teristics:
• Index. First value Index free in the table of the current RMon statistics of the database.
• Data Source and Owner. Respectively Ethernet port and user of the instance per Port just cre-
ated for the count of the RMon statistics.

Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Select the Ethernet History tab.


3. Select the instance you wish to delete.

4. Press Remove and confirm.


The instance is deleted from the list.

Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the history of the
RMON statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING The recommended maximum total number of instances is 40.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Select the Ethernet Service History tab.

3. Press Add.
4. Set, in Index box, a value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of history
of RMon statistics (number between 1 and 65535).
It is not possible to set a value already present in the list or in Ethernet History tab.

5. Set, in the box Data source, the Ethernet port you wish to enable for the count of the history of the
RMon statistics for the specific instance.
The Ethernet port identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.

6. Set, in Owner box, the information relevant to the user who is enabling the instance (alphanumeric
string of 30 characters at most).
Optional parameter.

7. Set, in Buckets Requested, the total number of samples to collect (value between 1 and 240).
The equipment stores these data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the
old one.
The recommended maximum value of bucket for all the instances is 2400.
8. Set, in the Interval (s) box, the sampling interval used to collect the data of the statistics history (value
between 1 and 3600 seconds).

188 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


The minimum recommended value is 60 seconds.

9. Set, in the box Select Service, the criterion you wish to use to filter the traffic:
• Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the port must
have to be counted in the history of the RMON statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority).
• SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must have
to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & C-VID/S-VID).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge
modality.
• CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port must
have to be counted in the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & C-VID/S-VID).
Value available and meaningful when the Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.

10.Set, in the box Priority, the priority value which the packet in input/output from the port must have to
be counted in the history of the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful only if the value Priority is present in the box Select Service.

11.Set, in the box SVID, the S-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
in the history of the RMon statistics.
The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab).
Parameter available and meaningful only if the value SVID is present in the box Select Service.

12.Set, in the box CVID, the C-VID which the packet in input/output from the port must have to be counted
in the history of the RMon statistics.
The set value must correspond to a VLAN ID present in the VLAN Table (see Static VLANs tab).
Parameter available and meaningful only if the value CVID is present in the box Select Service.

13.Press Apply.
The message Ethernet Service Statistics for <nome porta> with <priority or identifier> is not present,
will be created? indicates that, for the selected Ethernet port and priority or C-VIS/S-VID there is not
an analogous instance in the Ethernet Service Statistics tab. Press OK to continue the operation.
The instance is added to the list.
The instance will be enabled until when deleted by the user (see Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority
or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
In the tab Ethernet Service Statistics, an instance per Port is automatically created with the following
characteristics:
• Index. First value Index free in the table of the history of RMon statistics of the database.
• Data Source, Owner, Priority or C-VID/S-VID. Respectively Ethernet port, user, priority or VLAN
identifier of the instance just created for the count of the history of RMon statistics.

Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the history of the
RMON statistics

User Profile | Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING This operation involves the loss of the values of the counters for the specific instance.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Settings.

2. Select the Ethernet Service History tab.

3. Select the instance you wish to delete.

4. Press Remove and confirm.


The instance is deleted from the list.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 189


Settings contextual area

This contextual area shows the status and RMon instances enabled for the count of the RMon statistics
(group Statistics and History).

Tab
Ethernet Statistics tab. RMon instances per Port (Statistics group).
Ethernet History tab. RMon instances per Port (History group).
Ethernet Service Statistics tab. RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID (Statis-
tics group).
Ethernet Service History tab. RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID (History
group).

Parameters
RMON Status. Status of the count of the statistics and of the history of the statistics for all the
RMon instance set by the user:
• Enabled. The count is active.
• Disabled. The count is not active.

Push-button
Refresh. Updates the context.
Help. Open the help on-line.

See also
Settings (command)
Activate the count of the RMon statistics
Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics
RMon standard (info)

Ethernet Statistics tab

The tab shows the RMon instances per Port enabled for the count of the RMon statistics (group Statistics).

Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated:
Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the
RMon statistics.
Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics
for the specific instance.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has enabled the instance.
Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alpha-
numeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip di-
rected upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed
with the tip directed downwards) and so on.

190 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


The selection of present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:
Sort Ascending. Not available in this context.
Sort Descending. Not available in this context.
Columns. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of a column in the table.

Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics

Ethernet History tab

The tab shows the RMon instances per Port enabled for the count of the history of the RMon statistics
(group History).

Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated:
Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the RMon instance in the database table
of history of RMon statistics.
Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the
count of the RMon statistics history is associated to.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has created the instance.
Buckets Requested. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these
data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one.
Interval (s). Sampling interval (in seconds) used to collect the data of the statistics his-
tory.

Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alpha-
numeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip di-
rected upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed
with the tip directed downwards) and so on.

The selection of present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:
Sort Ascending. Not available in this context.
Sort Descending. Not available in this context.
Columns. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of a column in the table.

Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 191


Ethernet Service Statistics tab

The tab shows the RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID enabled for the count of the
RMon statistics (group Statistics).

Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated:
Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the
RMon statistics.
Data source.Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics
for the specific instance.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has enabled the port.
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority.
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the Switch
is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the Switch
is in Customer Bridge modality.
Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alpha-
numeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip di-
rected upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed
with the tip directed downwards) and so on.

Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the RMon sta-
tistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the
RMon statistics

Ethernet Service History tab

The tab shows the RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID enabled for the count of the
history of the RMon statistics (group History).

Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one instance for which are indicated:
Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of his-
tory of RMon statistics.
Data source. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the history of RMon
statistics for the specific instance.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).

192 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Owner. Information relevant to the user who has created the instance.
Buckets Requested. Total number of samples to collect. The equipment stores these
data in a circular buffer, where the new information in input overwrites the old one.
Interval (s). Sampling interval (in seconds) used to collect the data of the statistics his-
tory.
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority.
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the Switch
is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) of the packet in input/output from the port.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the Switch
is in Customer Bridge modality.

Selecting the heading of the Index column, the rows of the table are sorted in increasing alpha-
numeric order with respect to the considered column and an arrow is displayed with the tip di-
rected upwards. The next selection sorts the rows in decreasing order (an arrow is displayed
with the tip directed downwards) and so on.

Push-button
Add. Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the history of
the RMON statistics
Remove. Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the his-
tory of the RMON statistics

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 193


Ethernet Statistics

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet Statistics displays the current values of the RMon statistic.
The traffic is analyzed subdivided per Ethernet port (RMon instances per Port).

Operations
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port)

GUI
Ethernet Statistics contextual area

See also
RMon standard (info)

Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one Ethernet port is enabled for the count and if the count
of the RMon statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics and
Activate the count of the RMon statistics).

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Statistics.


The Ethernet Statistics contextual area displays the value of the RMon counters for every RMon instance
per Port.

194 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Ethernet Statistics contextual area

The contextual area displays the current values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port).

Table
Counters. The first rows indicate the characteristics of the RMon instance:
• Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the
RMon statistics.
• Owner. User who has enabled the instance.
The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.6).

<Ethernet port>. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of RMon statistics for the
specific RMon instance per Port.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number)
followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Every port (RMon instance) corresponds to a column where the results of the relevant RMon
counters are displayed.

Push-button
Help. Open the help on line.
Refresh. Update the table of counters.

See also
Ethernet Statistics (command)
RMon standard (info)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 195


Tab.6 RMon counters (Ethernet Statistics - RMon instance per Port)

Counter Packets with length Packet with length Packet with length FCS *
Description lower than longer than n between 64 and n
64 octects (MTU value) octets (MTU value) octets
(Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) (Good packet)

Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi


cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast

Drop Events - - - - - - - - - OK
Number of dropped packets **
- - - - - - - - - KO

Octets x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received octets
x x x x x x x x x KO

Pkts x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received packets
x x x x x x x x x KO

BroadcastPkts - - - - - - - x - OK
Number of packets received directed to the broadcast ad-
- - - - - - - - - KO
dresses

MulticastPkts - - - - - - - - x OK
Number of packets received directed to a multicast ad-
- - - - - - - - - KO
dresses

UndersizePkts x x x - - - - - - OK
Number of Undersize packets received
- - - - - - - - - KO

OversizePkts - - - x x x - - - OK
Number of Oversize packets received
- - - x x x - - - KO
Fragments - - - - - - - - - OK
Number of Undersize packets received
x x x - - - - - - KO

CRC Align Errors - - - - - - - - - OK


Number of Good and Oversize packets received
- - - x x x x x x KO

Pkts 64 Octets - - - - - - x x x OK
Number of packets transmitted/received with 64 octets in
length - - - - - - x x x KO

Pkts 65 to 127 - - - - - - x x x OK
Number of packets transmitted/received with length be-
tween 65 and 127 octets - - - - - - x x x KO

Pkts 128 to 255 Octets - - - - - - x x x OK


Number of packets transmitted/received with length be-
tween 128 and 255 octet) - - - - - - x x x KO

Pkts 256 to 511 Octets - - - - - - x x x OK


Number of packets transmitted/received with length be-
tween 256 and 511 octets - - - - - - x x x KO

Pkts 512 to 1023 Octets - - - - - - x x x OK


Number of packets transmitted/received with length be-
tween 512 and 1023 octets - - - - - - x x x KO

Pkts > 1024 Octets - - - x x x x x x OK


Number of packets transmitted/received with length equal
to or greater than 1024 octets - - - x x x x x x KO

x Counter incremented. - Counter not incremented.


* OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct.
KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).
** Packets are discarded after the exhaustion of the local memory resources. This value is not necessarily
the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other rea-
sons. This value does not include Output Dropped Frames.

196 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Ethernet Service Statistics

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet Service Statistics displays the current values of RMon statistic counters.
The analysed traffic is filtered according to the input/output port and the packet characteristics: value of
User Priority (RMon instances Port & Priority) or C-TAG identifier or S-TAG identifier (RMon instances Port
& C-VID/S-VID).

Operations
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & C-
VID/S-VID)

GUI
Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area

See also
RMon standard (info)

Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & C-
VID/S-VID)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is enabled for the count and if the count
of the RMon statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count
of the RMon statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics).

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service Statistics.


The Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area displays the value of RMon counters for every RMon
instances Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 197


Ethernet Service Statistics contextual area

The contextual area displays the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and
Port & C-VID/S-VID).

Table
Counters. The first rows indicate the characteristics of the RMon instance:
• Index. Value which identifies in unique mode the instance in the database table of the
RMon statistics.
• Owner. User who has enabled the RMon instance.
• Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the
port must have to be counted in the RMon statistics.
Value meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority.
• SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port
must have to be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the
Switch is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.
• CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the
port must have to be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the
Switch is in Customer Bridge modality.
The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.7).

<Ethernet port>. Identifier of the Ethernet port enabled to the count of the RMon statistics for
the specific RMon instances.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port number)
followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Every RMon instance corresponds to one column where are indicated the characteristics of the
instance and the results of the relevant RMon counters.

Push-button
Help. Open the help on line.
Refresh. Update the table of counters.

See also
Ethernet Service Statistics (command)
RMon standard (info)

198 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Tab.7 RMon counters (Ethernet Service Statistics and Ethernet Service History - RMon instances
Port & Priority e Port & C-VID/S-VID)

WARNING The counters per service (RMon instances Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID) include even
frames received with wrong FCS or frames too long. The condition can be checked using the counters per
port (RMon instances per Port).

Counter Packets (Tagged or Packet (Tagged or Packet (Tagged or FCS *


Description Untagged) with Untagged) with Untagged) with
length lower than length longer than n length between 64
64 octects (MTU value) octets and n (MTU value) oc-
(Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) tets (Good packet)

Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi


cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast

Received Pkts - - - x x x x x x OK
Total number of Good and Oversize packets received
- - - x x x x x x KO

Sent Pkts - - - - - - x x x OK
Total number of transmitted packets
- - - - - - - - - KO

Received Octects - - - x x x x x x OK
Total number of received octets
- - - x x x x x x KO

Sent Octects - - - - - - x x x OK
Total number of transmitted octets
- - - - - - - - - KO
Received Discard Pkts - - - x x x x x x OK
Total number of inbound packets which were discarded due
- - - x x x x x x KO
to forbidden forwarding or policing violation.

Sent Discard Pkts - - - x x x x x x OK


Total number of outbound packets which were chosen to be
- - - - - - - - - KO
discarded even though no errors had been detected to pre-
vent their being transmitted. Possible reasons for discard-
ing such a packet could buffer space lack due to output
shaping, rate limitation or egress MTU exceeded.

Received Unicast Pkts - - - x - - x - - OK


Total number of inbound Unicast packets
- - - x - - x - - KO

Sent Unicast Pkts - - - - - - x - - OK


Total number of outbound Unicast packets
- - - - - - - - - KO

Received Not Unicast Pkts - - - - x x - x x OK


Total number of inbound Non-Unicast packets
- - - - x x - x x KO

Sent Not Unicast Pkts - - - - - - - x x OK


Total number of outbound Non-Unicast packets
- - - - - - - - - KO

x Counter incremented
- Counter not incremented.

* OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct.


KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 199


Ethernet History

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet History displays the history of the RMon statistics.
The traffic is analyzed subdivided per Ethernet port (RMon instances per Port).

Operations
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)

GUI
Ethernet History contextual area

See also
RMon standard (info)

Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is created and if the count of the RMon
statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics and
Activate the count of the RMon statistics).

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet History.


The Ethernet History contextual area shows the history of RMon statistics for all instances per Port.
In any moment it is possible to Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port).

Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet History.

2. Set the criteria used to filter the records. The filter criteria works in AND logic:
• Source. Ports of the Switch for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.
To activate a port, select the relevant box ( ), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant box ( ).
• Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances for which you wish to display the sampling
interval in table.
To activate a user, select the relevant box ( ), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant box ( ).

It is possible to activate more ports/users at the same time. By default, the table displays the records
relevant to all the ports/users.

3. Press Apply Filter.

4. To remove the filters and display in the table all the records relevant to all the ports/users, press Re-
move Filter.

200 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Ethernet History contextual area

The contextual area displays the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port).

Table
Every line of the table corresponds to a sampling interval of an instance for which is indicated:
Time (Sample Start). Start instant (day/month/year, hour/minute/second) of every
sampling interval with which the statistics history data are collected.
Source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the count of
the statistics history is associated to.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Owner. User who has enabled the instance.
The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.8).

The selection of present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:
Sort Ascending. Not available in this context.
Sort Descending. Not available in this context.
Columns. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of a column in the table.

Push-button
Help. Open the help on line.
Refresh. Update the context.
Apply Filter/Remove Filter. Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port)

See also
Ethernet History (command)
RMon standard (info)

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 201


Tab.8 RMon counters (Ethernet History - RMon instance per Port)

Counter Packets with length Packet with length Packet with length FCS *
Description lower than longer than n between 64 and n
64 octects (MTU value) octets (MTU value) octets
(Undersize packet) (Oversize packet) (Good packet)

Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi Uni Broad Multi


cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast cast

Drop Events - - - - - - - - - OK
Number of dropped packets **
- - - - - - - - - KO

Octets x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received octets
x x x x x x x x x KO

Pkts x x x x x x x x x OK
Number of received packets
x x x x x x x x x KO

BroadcastPkts - - - - - - - x - OK
Number of packets received directed to the broadcast ad-
- - - - - - - - - KO
dresses

MulticastPkts - - - - - - - - x OK
Number of packets received directed to a multicast ad-
- - - - - - - - - KO
dresses

UndersizePkts x x x - - - - - - OK
Number of Undersize packets received
- - - - - - - - - KO

OversizePkts - - - x x x - - - OK
Number of Oversize packets received
- - - x x x - - - KO
Fragments - - - - - - - - - OK
Number of Undersize packets received
x x x - - - - - - KO

CRC Align Errors - - - - - - - - - OK


Number of Good and Oversize packets received
- - - x x x x x x KO

Utilization (%) - - - - - - - - - -
Estimate (expressed in percentage) of the average use of
the port during the sampling interval.
The percentage of use refers to the line rate of the associ-
ated porta.
The percentage of use of the radio port refers to the rate
of 2.5 Gbps

x Counter incremented
- Counter not incremented.

* OK. Frame Check Sequence (FCS) correct.


KO. Wrong FCS against an integer number (FCS Error) or not integer number of octets (Alignment Error).

** Packets are discarded after the exhaustion of the local memory resources. This value is not necessarily
the absolute number of discarded packets, as it represents only the number of times that this condition
occurred after the exhaustion of the memory resources; the packets can be discarded also for other rea-
sons. This value does not include Output Dropped Frames.

202 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Ethernet Service History

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

The command Ethernet Service History displays the history of the RMon statistics.
The analysed traffic is filtered according to the input/output port and to the characteristics of the packet:
value of User Priority (RMon instance Port & Priority) or C-TAG or S-TAG identifier (RMon instance Port &
C-VID/S-VID).

Operations
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID)
Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID)

GUI
Ethernet Service History contextual area

See also
RMon standard (info)

Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-
VID)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

WARNING Operation meaningful only if at least one RMon instance is created and if the count of the RMon
statistics is active (see Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the history
of the RMON statistics and Activate the count of the RMon statistics).

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service History.


The Ethernet Service History contextual area shows the history of RMon statistics for all Port & Priority
and Port & C-VID/S-VID instances.
In any moment it is possible to Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and
Port & C-VID/S-VID) according to different criteria.

Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID)

User Profile | Read Only, Maint., Read/Write, Admin.

1. Select Maintenance > RMON > Ethernet Service History.

2. Set the criteria used to filter the records. The filter criteria works in AND logic:
• Source. Ports of the Switch for which you wish to display the sampling intervals in table.
To activate a port, select the relevant box ( ), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant box ( ).
• Owner. Users who have enabled the RMON instances for which you wish to display the sampling
interval in table.
To activate a user, select the relevant box ( ), to deactivate it deactivate the relevant box ( ).

It is possible to activate more ports/users at the same time. By default, the table displays the records
relevant to all the ports/users.
3. Press Apply Filter.
To remove the filters and display in the table all the records relevant to all the ports/users, press Re-
move Filter.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 203


Ethernet Service History contextual area

The contextual area displays the history of the RMon statistics (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port &
C-VID/S-VID).

Table
Every row of the table corresponds to one sampling interval of one instance for which is indicat-
ed:
Time (Sample Start). Start instant (day/month/year, hour/minute/second) of every
sampling interval with which the statistics history data are collected.
Source. Identifier of the Ethernet port which the RMon instance enabled to the count of
the statistics history is associated to.
The identifier is a combination of slot number and the port number (slot number/port
number) followed by the port name:
• Mngt. Management Ethernet port.
• Aux. Auxiliary Ethernet port.
• LAN-1. First line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• LAN-2. Second line Ethernet port (electric or optical).
• Radio. Ethernet port towards the Radio.
Owner. User who has enabled the instance.
Priority. Priority value (Internal Priority) which the packet in input/output from the port
must have to be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & Priority.
SVID. S-VID (Service VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port
must have to be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the Switch
is in Provider Bridge or Provider Edge Bridge modality.
CVID. C-VID (Customer VLAN Identifier) which the packet in input/output from the port
must have to be counted by the RMon statistics.
Value available and meaningful for RMon instances Port & C-VID/S-VID when the Switch
is in Customer Bridge modality.
The remnant rows indicate the RMon counters (see Tab.7).

The selection of present in the header of each column, shows the following commands:
Sort Ascending. Not available in this context.
Sort Descending. Not available in this context.
Columns. Activate ( ) or deactivate ( ) the display of a column in the table.

Push-button
Help. Open the help on line.
Refresh. Update the context.
Apply Filter/Remove Filter. Filter the history of RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority
and Port & C-VID/S-VID)

See also
Ethernet Service History (command)
RMon standard (info)

204 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


RMon standard (info)

RMon Standard
RMon (Remote Monitoring) is a standard whose function is providing a set of services of statistics
count, monitoring and alarm report with reference to the activity of a LAN network.
These services are defined in terms of MIB (Management Information Base) group described in
the document RFC2819 - Remote Network Monitoring Management Information Base, which
must be read for any further detail.

Outline on the operation


RMon standard is based on two components: an agent (RMon probe) and a client (remote man-
agement station).
The agent saves the data within its own RMon tables present on the network devices (equip-
ment, routers, etc.). The RMon probes can see only the traffic flowing through themselves.
The remote management station communicates with the RMon agent to obtain and correlate the
RMon data. Generally, the station is equipped with an interface (graphic or textual) which allows
the display and the analysis of the collected RMon data.

Management from Web LCT


The Rmon functionality available in WEB LCT allows monitoring the status of the Ethernet Switch
ports in compliance with the RMON standard.
With reference to what depicted in the previous paragraph, the Rmon functionality acts as client
which, through the commands present in the GUI, allows the analysis and the management of
the data collected by the probes.
The probes are present at level of:
Port (line/radio) of the Ethernet switch (RMon instance per Port). This instance allows
monitoring all the traffic in input/output to/from one port of the Ethernet Switch.
VLAN (RMon instance Port & C-VID/S-VID). This instance allows monitoring only the traf-
fic in input/output to/from one Ethernet port with a given VLAN identifier (C-VID or S-
VID according to the Bridge operating modality).
Priority (RMon instance Port & Priority). This instance allows monitoring only the traffic
in input/output to/from one Ethernet port with a given priority value (Internal Priority).
The probes collect the statistic data, which are stored in the RMon table of the equipment.
Currently, the ALFOplus80HD equipment implements the RMON MIB groups Statistics and His-
tory.

WARNING The recommended maximum total number of instances (per Port, Port & C-VID/S-
VID e Port & Priority) is 40.

RMON MIB group: Statistics


Rmon functionality can display to the user, through the GUI, the current statistics measured by
the RMon probes (see Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per
Port) and Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority and
Port & C-VID/S-VID).
To display the counters of an instance, it is necessary to enable the involved instance (see Set
a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics and Set a RMon instance Port &
Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the RMon statistics) and then activate the counting
(see Activate the count of the RMon statistics).
The count will be active for this instance until the user deactivates it (see Deactivate the count
of the RMon statistics) or deletes the instance (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count
of the RMon statistics and Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the
count of the RMon statistics.

RMON MIB group: History


Rmon functionality can display to the user, through the GUI, the evolution in time (history) of
the statistics relevant to the counters in input/output of every monitored probes (see Display
the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) and Display the history of the RMon
statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID).

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 205


At equipment level, the value of the counters of the RMon probes is stored in the statistics his-
tory every x seconds (sampling interval). The equipment stores these data into a circular buffer
where, when full, the new information replaces the old one (value set to 240 samples, which
allows memorizing 4 hours into the equipment).
In order to memorize in the database and display the statistics history of one instance, it is nec-
essary to activate the instance (see Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of
the RMON statistics and Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count
of the history of the RMON statistics) and then activate the count (see Activate the count of the
RMon statistics).
The count will be active for this instance until the user deactivates it (see Deactivate the count
of the RMon statistics) or deletes the instance (see Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count
of the history of the RMON statistics and Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/
S-VID for the count of the history of the RMON statistics).
When an instance is activated, the supervision system starts memorizing the data relevant to
the statistics and makes them available to the user, in table format, subdivided for single RMon
instance.

See also
Settings (command)
Ethernet Statistics (command)
Ethernet Service Statistics (command)
Ethernet History (command)
Ethernet Service History (command)

206 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


ALARMS LIST

Tab.9 indicates the list of the alarms relevant to the equipment.


The alarms are not listed in alphabetical order but they are grouped according to the corresponding parts
of the equipment.

Equipment
Common
Eth Lan
P.M. G.828
P.M. Rx Power
P.M. Tx Power
P.M. ACM
Plug-in module
Radio
SETS
Unit

For each alarm, the wording present in the Events area (see Equipment status area) of the WEB LCT page
and the wording present in the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area are displayed.
Some alarms have some wordings in italic contained between the symbols < >. They, in the alarm dis-
played in the Events area, represent a variable.
The symbol “-“means that the alarm is not meaningful for the Alarm Severity Config. contextual area.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 207


Tab.9 - Alarms list

Events area Alarm Severity Config. alarms

Equipment

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Critical -

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Major -

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Minor -

Equip. Alarm Synthesis Warning -

Common
Equip Manual Operation equipManualOperation

NMS Wake Up Alarm equipManagerWakeUpAlarm

Eth Lan
<Radio, Extra, Lan-1, Lan-2> Loss of Signal Alarm ethLanPhyLinkLoss

<Radio, Extra, Lan-1, Lan-2> Unresolved Autonegotiation Alarm ethLanPhyAutoNegotiation

P.M. G.828

P.M. RADIO G.828 15Mcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MEsAlarm


P.M. RADIO G.828 15Mcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSepAlarm

P.M. RADIO G.828 15Mcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-15MSesAlarm

P.M. RADIO G.828 24Hcounter ES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HEsAlarm


P.M. RADIO G.828 24Hcounter SEP threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSepAlarm

P.M. RADIO G.828 24Hcounter SES threshold cross Alarm pmG828-24HSesAlarm

P.M. RADIO G.828 UAS Alarm pmG828-UASAlarm

P.M. Rx Power

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRltsAlarm

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts2Alarm


P.M. RT-1A RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts3Alarm

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts4Alarm

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 15Mcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-15MRlts5Alarm


P.M. RT-1A RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRltsAlarm

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts2Alarm

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts3 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts3Alarm

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts4 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts4Alarm

P.M. RT-1A RxPower 24Hcounter Rlts5 threshold cross Alarm pmRxPwr-24HRlts5Alarm

P.M. Tx Power

P.M. RADIO TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTltsAlarm


P.M. RADIO TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts2Alarm

P.M. RADIO TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts3Alarm

P.M. RADIO TxPower 15Mcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-15MTlts4Alarm

P.M. RADIO TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts1 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTltsAlarm

208 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Events area Alarm Severity Config. alarms

P.M. RADIO TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts2 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts2Alarm

P.M. RADIO TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts3 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts3Alarm

P.M. RADIO TxPower 24Hcounter Tlts4 threshold cross Alarm pmTxPwr-24HTlts4Alarm

P.M. ACM

P.M. ACM 15M counter BPSK threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-Alarm

P.M. ACM 15M counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-4QAMstrAlarm

P.M. ACM 15M counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-4QAMAlarm

P.M. ACM 15M counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-16QAMAlarm

P.M. ACM 15M counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-15M-64QAMAlarm

P.M. ACM 24H counter BPSK threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-Alarm

P.M. ACM 24H counter 4QAM Strong threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-4QAMstrAlarm

P.M. ACM 24H counter 4QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-4QAMAlarm


P.M. ACM 24H counter 16QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-16QAMAlarm

P.M. ACM 24H counter 64QAM threshold cross Alarm pmACM-24H-64QAMAlarm

Plug-in module
<Lan-1, Lan-2> Plug-in module Fail Alarm plug-inModuleAlarm

Radio

Invalid Frequency Alarm radioInvalidFrequencyAlarm


Radio Demodulator Fail Alarm radioDemodulatorFailAlarm

Radio Rx Power Low Alarm radioRxPowerLowAlarm

Radio Tx Power Alarm radioTxPowerAlarm

Radio Vco Fail Alarm radioRtVcoFail

Radio Rx AGC Alarm radioRxAGCAlarm

Radio Rx Quality Low Alarm radioRxQualityLowAlarm

Radio Rx Quality Low Warning radioRxQualityLowWarning

Radio Configuration parameter Mismatch Alarm radioConfigurationMismatch

Link Telemetry Fail Alarm radioEquipLinkTelemetryFailAlarm

Adaptive Modulation Reduced Capacity Notification radioEquipReducedCapacityAlarm

Radio Link ID Alarm radioEquipLinkIdAlarm

Radio Ber Sync Loss Alarm radioEquipBerSyncLossAlarm

Remote Radio Demodulator Fail Alarm radioBranchRemDemodulatorFailAlarm

SETS

BASE BAND Sets <synchronism signal name> Active Status timingSynkActiveStatus

BASE BAND Sets <synchronism signal name> Drift Alarm timingSynkDriftAlarm


BASE BAND Sets <synchronism signal name> LTI Alarm timingSynkLossAlarm

BASE BAND Sets Free Running Status timingGeneratorFreeRunningStatus

BASE BAND Sets Holdover Status timingGeneratorHoldoverStatus

BASE BAND Sets T0 Fail Alarm timingGeneratorT0FailAlarm

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 209


Events area Alarm Severity Config. alarms

Unit

Unit Fail Alarm unitFailAlarm

Unit Hw Mismatch Alarm unitHwMismatchAlarm

Unit Missing Alarm unitMissingAlarm

Unit Not Responding Alarm unitNotRespondingAlarm

Unit Sw Mismatch Alarm unitSwMismatchAlarm

210 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


OPERATIONS LIST

A
Adaptive modulation configuration parameters, verify .................................................................. 92

Alarms
Change the severity of an alarm ........................................................................................... 73
Delete the log of the equipment alarms ................................................................................. 55
Enable/disable an alarm ...................................................................................................... 72
Enable/disable the forwarding of the trap of an alarm .............................................................. 72
Save the log of the equipment alarms ................................................................................... 54
Verify the severity and the enabling/forwarding status of the alarms ......................................... 72

ATPC
Functioning status, verify/modify .........................................................................................168
Intervention threshold, verify/modify ...................................................................................169
Maximum output power value at the transmitter, verify/modify ...............................................168
Range of the ATPC regulation, verify/modify .........................................................................169
Table resuming the minimum/maximum power in transmission/reception for every ACM profile,
display .............................................................................................................................169

B
Basic configuration of the equipment, verify ................................................................................ 34
Bridge Mode
Modify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch ......................................................................101
Verify the Bridge mode of the Ethernet Switch .......................................................................101

D
Delete the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................................. 55

Duplexer frequency, verify/modify ............................................................................................166

E
Enable a new equipment feature ............................................................................................... 35

Equipment configuration
Retrieve the equipment configuration automatically saved by the program before the last
operation of configuration restore (configuration revert) .......................................................... 69
Save the whole equipment configuration (configuration backup) ............................................... 68
Transfer the equipment configuration previously saved (configuration restore) ........................... 68

Equipment firmware
Switch the memory benches ................................................................................................ 62

Equipment identifier, modify ..................................................................................................... 34

Equipment reference date/time, align to the PC date/time ............................................................ 35

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 211


Equipment software reset .................................................................................................... 34, 63

Equipment software/firmware
Update .............................................................................................................................. 61
Verify the version ............................................................................................................... 61

Equipment units (type, code, version and functional status), verify ................................................ 36

Ethernet ports
Activate the loop on line side of a port ..................................................................................104
Deactivate the loop on line side of a port ..............................................................................104
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for a port ....................................................104
Modify the Bridge Port Type for a port ..................................................................................105
Modify the enabling status of a port .....................................................................................103
Modify the inversion status of the Tx and Rx lines of a port .....................................................105
Modify the maximum dimension of the packet accepted by a ports ...........................................105
Modify the transmission speed of a port ................................................................................105
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for a port ...................................................................104
Verify the Ethernet ports configuration ......................................................................... 103, 106
Verify the flow control configuration of the Ethernet ports .......................................................106
Verify/modify the traffic class which a packet, in input from a port, is assigned to,
depending on its priority (User Priority) ................................................................................106

I
IP address of the agent SNMP, modify ........................................................................................ 34

L
LAN
Modify the operating mode of line synchronism (role) of the LAN’s, verify/modify .......................156
Link identification number, verify/modify .................................................................................... 93

LLF
Configure a port for the management of LLF functionality .......................................................127
Configure the radio circuit for the forwarding of the LOS alarm present on LAN ..........................128
Enable/disable the forwarding of LLF alarm on the radio .........................................................129
Enable/disable the forwarding of LOS alarm of a LAN to the radio ............................................129
Enable/disable the LLF functionality for a LAN ........................................................................128
Modify the hysteresis value for the LLF functionality ...............................................................129
Remove a port of the switch from the management of LLF functionality ....................................128
Remove a radio circuit from the management of LLF functionality for a given LAN ......................128
Verify the status of the LLF functionality for the Ethernet ports ................................................127

Lower threshold of the modulation, verify/ modify ....................................................................... 93

M
MAN OP
Activate/deactivate a radio loop ..........................................................................................180
Disable/enable the modulation of the RF carrier .....................................................................179
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ............................................................................180

212 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................181
Turn-off/turn-on the transmitter ..........................................................................................179
Verify the active manual operations ...................................................................................... 30
Verify the manual operations status .....................................................................................179
Verify/modify the manual operation timeout ........................................................................... 30

MNGT port
Abilitare/disabilitare l’allarme Loss of Signal per la porta di management ..................................144
Modify the activation state of the autonegotiation for the management port ..............................143
Modify the enabling status of management port .....................................................................143
Modify the IP Address used as Default Gateway .....................................................................142
Modify the IP Address/NetMask of the management port ........................................................142
Modify the transmission speed of the management port ..........................................................144
Modify the VLAN reserved for the in band supervision .............................................................143
Restart the auto negotiation procedure for the management port .............................................144
Verify the configuration of the management port ...................................................................142

Modify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports .............................................125

Modulation status of the RF carrier, verify/modify .......................................................................167

O
Operating status of the adaptive modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................. 93
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 92

Operation of the transmitter, verify/modify ................................................................................167

P
PB-VLAN
Verify the C-VID registration table (C-VID Registration) ..........................................................122
Verify the parameters for the Tunneling management ............................................................107
Verify the Provider Edge Port configuration table (PEP Configuration) .......................................122
PM
Activate one or more measures ............................................................................................ 41
Deactivate one or more measures ........................................................................................ 41
Modify the modality used to increase the counters (ACM Radio) ................................................ 44
Reset the threshold exceeding alarms of one or more PM measures .......................................... 41
Reset the values of the records daily and primary of one or more PM measures .......................... 41
Set the thresholds of the control parameters and alarms of a PM measure ................................. 42
Verify the status, the results and the threshold exceeding alarms of a PM measure ..................... 40

Q
Queue Depth
Modify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ..............................133
Verify the policy for the management of the depth of the queues in output ...............................133

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 213


R
Radio BER
Activate the measure .........................................................................................................175
Deactivate the measure .....................................................................................................175
Verify the configuration parameters of the measure ...............................................................175
Verify the status of the measure ..........................................................................................175

Radio branch label, verify/modify .............................................................................................. 97

Radio loop
Activate ...........................................................................................................................177
Deactivate ........................................................................................................................177
Verify the status ................................................................................................................177

Reference band
Modify .............................................................................................................................. 92
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 92

Reference modulation
Modify .............................................................................................................................. 92
Verify ............................................................................................................................... 92

Remote equipment list


Add a station ..................................................................................................................... 24
Add equipment .................................................................................................................. 25
Open the WEB page of equipment (Remote Link) .................................................................... 26
Remove a station ............................................................................................................... 25
Remove equipment ............................................................................................................. 26
Rename a station ............................................................................................................... 24
Reset ................................................................................................................................ 26
Resolution of the received power (Prx), verify/modify ..................................................................168

Resolution of the transmitted power (Ptx), verify/modify .............................................................168

Restore Factory Default of the equipment ................................................................................... 62

RMon
Activate the count of the RMon statistics ...............................................................................184
Deactivate the count of the RMon statistics ...........................................................................185
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the history of the RMON statistics ....................188
Delete a RMon instance per Port for the count of the RMon statistics ........................................185
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the history
of the RMON statistics ........................................................................................................189
Delete a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID for the count of the RMon statistics 187
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID) .203
Display the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) ..........................................200
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances per Port) ..............................194
Display the values of the RMon statistic counters (RMon instances Port & Priority
and Port & C-VID/S-VID) ....................................................................................................197
Filter the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instance Port & Priority and Port & C-VID/S-VID) ....203
Filter the history of the RMon statistic (RMon instances per Port) .............................................200
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the history of the RMON statistics .........................187
Set a RMon instance per Port to the count of the RMon statistics ..............................................185
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the history of the RMON sta-
tistics ..............................................................................................................................188
Set a RMon instance Port & Priority or Port & C-VID/S-VID to the count of the RMon statistics .....186
Verify the count status of the RMon statistics ........................................................................184

214 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Routing Table
Add an element to the Routing Table ....................................................................................148
Remove one or more elements from the Routing Table ...........................................................149
Verify the Routing Table of the equipment ............................................................................148

S
S/N measure
Update the value ...............................................................................................................173
Verify the value .................................................................................................................173

Save the equipment configuration ............................................................................................. 56

Save the log of the operations executed by the users ................................................................... 55

Statistics
Reset the counters’ results (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ......................................................137
Reset the counters’ results (Interfaces group) .......................................................................136
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Ethernet-like Statistics group) ............................136
Verify the counters of the Ethernet interfaces (Interfaces group) .............................................136

Synchronisation
Enable/disable the use of a synchronism source ....................................................................153
Enable/disable the use of the source quality as criterion to select the synchronism .....................153
Force the quality level in input and/or output of a synchronism source ......................................155
Force the status of the T0 synchronisation ............................................................................151
Force the use of a synchronism source .................................................................................154
Modify the use priority of a synchronism source .....................................................................154
Restore the availability of a source for the selection of the T0 synchronism without waiting
for the expiry of Wait Time .................................................................................................155
Set a synchronism source as preferential ..............................................................................154
Set the Hold Off Time parameter .........................................................................................152
Set the threshold levels of the LTI alarm ..............................................................................152
Set the WTR Time parameter ..............................................................................................152
Verify the status and configuration of the synchronism sources ................................................153
Verify the status and configuration of the T0 synchronism .......................................................151
Verify/modify the management of SSM protocol for every single LAN ........................................156
Verify/modify the management of synchronisation .................................................................153

T
Threshold level of the signal at reception, verify/modify ............................................................... 97

Transmission frequency, verify/modify ......................................................................................166

U
Upper threshold of the modulation, verify/modify ........................................................................ 93

Users
Add a user ......................................................................................................................... 82
Add a user group ................................................................................................................ 77
Delete a user ..................................................................................................................... 83

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 215


Delete a user group ............................................................................................................ 79
Force the logout of a user .................................................................................................... 89
Modify a user ..................................................................................................................... 83
Modify a user group ............................................................................................................ 78
Set/modify the IP address of Permanent Login ....................................................................... 87
Verify the IP address of Permanent Login ............................................................................... 87
Verify the user groups ......................................................................................................... 77
Verify the users connected to the equipment .......................................................................... 89
Verify the users list ............................................................................................................. 82

V
Verify the equipment feature .................................................................................................... 35

Verify the EtherType values in the S-Tag field of the Ethernet ports ..............................................125

VLAN
Create one or more static VLANs .........................................................................................116
Delete one or more static VLANs ..........................................................................................118
Enable/disable the learning of the addresses in the MAC Table .................................................114
Modify the aging time of the addresses stored in the MAC Table ..............................................115
Modify the check modality (filtering) applied to the packets in input on a port ............................115
Modify the configuration of a static VLAN ..............................................................................117
Modify the default value to enter in the User Priority field of the packets without priority 802.1p
received on the port ..........................................................................................................116
Modify the default VLAN identifier of a port (Port VID) ............................................................116
Modify the limit of MAC unicast addresses managed by the Switch for the VLAN’s ......................115
Modify the type of packets accepted in input by a port ............................................................115
Verify the basic configuration of the VLAN management .........................................................114
Verify the existing static VLANs ...........................................................................................116

W
Wake Up functionality
Activate ............................................................................................................................ 58
Deactivate ......................................................................................................................... 58
Set the execution parameters .............................................................................................. 58
Verify the status ................................................................................................................. 58

WEB LCT page


Close the page ................................................................................................................... 17
Display the page of equipment (Remote Link) ........................................................................ 22
Open more pages ............................................................................................................... 16
Open the page from Browser ............................................................................................... 16

216 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


PARAMETERS LIST

A Enhanced eth monitoring ....................... 38


Eth OAM .............................................. 38
ACM Engine .............................................. 94 Eth ring protection ................................ 38
ACM Table ................................................ 94 ETH transport ...................................... 38

Active Modulation ................................. 94 Packet processing (1) ............................ 38

Ethernet Capacity ................................. 94 Security package .................................. 38


Sync Eth ............................................. 38
Agent IP Address .................................. 20, 37
Sync quality management ..................... 38
Alarms ..................................................... 75
Upgrade up to 16QAM ........................... 38
Group/Alarm ........................................ 74
Upgrade up to 250M ............................. 38
Severity .............................................. 74 Upgrade up to 4QAM ............................. 38
Trap Notification ................................... 74
Upgrade up to 500M ............................. 38
ATPC Upgrade up to 64QAM ........................... 38
ATPC Full Range ..................................171
Equipment firmware
ATPC Regulation ..................................171 Actual Release ..................................... 64
ATPC Thresholds on Local PRx ...............171
Bench Status ....................................... 64
Current ATPC Power .............................171
Downloading Status .............................. 64
Max Ptx ..............................................171 Release Bench 1 ................................... 65
Tx Power Control .................................171
Release Bench 2 ................................... 65
Software ............................................. 64
Software Version .................................. 64
Unit .................................................... 64
B
Equipment ID ...................................... 20, 37
Bandwidth ................................................ 94
Equipment Type ................................... 20, 37
Bridge Mode ...................................... 20, 102
Equipment unit
Expected Type ..................................... 38
HW Ver. .............................................. 38
Par Part Number ................................... 38
C Part Number ........................................ 38
Real Type ............................................ 38
Carrier Only ..................................... 170, 182
Serial Number ...................................... 38
Unit Alarms ......................................... 39

Ethernet Bridge Mode ................................ 37


D EthType

Dplx Freq ................................................170 Description .........................................126


Egress EtherType ................................126
Ingress EtherType ...............................126
Port ...................................................126

E
Equipment Feature
1+0 Stand alone configuration ............... 38
ACM ................................................... 38

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 217


F Auto Neg ............................................146
Default Gateway ..................................146
Factory default .......................................... 65 IP Address ..........................................146

Firmware Version ...................................... 37 Link Status .........................................146


Net Mask ............................................146
FTP protocol ............................................. 14
Port Alarm Report ................................146
Speed ................................................146
VLAN ID .............................................146

H
Help Web Server ....................................... 14
P
PB-VLAN
Acceptable Frame Types .......................124
I
BPDU Priority ......................................112
IP Address ................................................ 37 COS Preservation ................................124
C-VLAN ID ..........................................123
Default User Priority .............................124
Dot1x ........................................ 112, 113
L GMRP ......................................... 112, 113
GVRP ......................................... 112, 113
Link Label ................................................ 98
IGMP .................................................113
LLF Ingress Filtering ..................................124
Alarm to Circuit ...................................130 LACP .......................................... 112, 113
Circuit ................................................130 Port .................................... 112, 123, 124
Delay Time .........................................130 P-VID ................................................124
Descr .................................................130 STP ........................................... 112, 113
Link ID ...............................................130 S-VID ................................................124
LLF Status ..........................................130 S-VLAN ID ..........................................123
LOS to Circuit .....................................130 Untagged CEP .....................................123
Port ...................................................130 Untagged PEP .....................................123
Signal Fail ..........................................130
Port Manager
Local Link ID ............................................ 95 Data Flow
Lower Profile ............................................ 94 Description ....................................111
Flow Control Admin Status ...............111
Flow Control Oper Status .................111
Port ..............................................111
Description ................................. 108, 112
M
Optical
MAC Address ............................................ 37 Description ....................................110
Fail Alarm ......................................110
Manager IP Address 1 ................................ 88
Link Length 50um (m) .....................110
Manager IP Address 2 ................................ 88 Link Length 62.5um (m) ..................110
Measurements Resolution Link Length 9um (m) ......................110
Nominal Bit Rate (Mbps) ..................110
Prx ....................................................170
Port ..............................................110
Ptx ....................................................170
Vendor Date ..................................110
MNGT port Vendor Name .................................110
Admin State .......................................146 Vendor PN .....................................110

218 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


Vendor SN .....................................110 RMON Status .................................190
Wave Length (nm) ..........................110
Routing Table
Physical
Destination .........................................150
Admin State ...................................109
Distance .............................................150
Auto Neg .......................................109
Gateway .............................................150
Bridge Port Type .............................109
Interface ............................................150
Duplex ..........................................109
Protocol .............................................150
Link Status ....................................108
MDI/MDIX .....................................109 Subnet Mask .......................................150

Media ............................................108 Rx Signal Level Alarm Threshold .................. 98


MTU ..............................................109
Port ..............................................108
Speed ...........................................109
Port ...................................................111 S
Priority 0 ............................................112
Priority 1 ............................................112 S/N ........................................................174
Priority 2 ............................................112 Statistics
Priority 3 ............................................112 Descr .................................................138
Priority 4 ............................................112 Port ...................................................138
Priority 5 ............................................112
Status signal ............................................. 75
Priority 6 ............................................112
Priority 7 ............................................112 Synchronisation
1000Base-T Role
Description ....................................161
Media ............................................161
Port ..............................................161
Q
Role ..............................................161
Queue Depth Alarms ...............................................157
Action ................................................134 Forced Switch ............................. 158, 182
Profile ................................................134 General
Profile description ................................134 Current .........................................158
Status ...........................................158
Hold Off Time ......................................157
Internal ..............................................158
R LAN SSM
Description ....................................160
Radio BER Media ............................................160
BER ...................................................176 Port ..............................................160
Elapsed Time ......................................176 Rx Dropped Packets ........................160
Errors ................................................176 Rx Errored Packets .........................160

Fail Alarms .........................................176 Rx Pkts .........................................160

Sync Loss Alarm ..................................176 Rx Quality .....................................160


SSM Enable ...................................160
Test Mode ..........................................176
Tx Pkts ..........................................160
Radio Branch Label .................................... 98 Tx Quality ......................................160
Reference Modulation ................................ 94 LTI Reset Time ....................................157
LTI Set Time .......................................157
Remote Element Table ............................... 27
Name .................................................158
Remote equipment list ............................... 27
Preferential Switch ...............................158
RMon Priority ...............................................158
Statistics Status Control ............................. 157, 182

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 219


Sync Loss ...........................................159 Max. VLAN ID .....................................119
T0 Member Ports .....................................121
Ovw Rx Qlty ..................................159 Num of VLANs in the System .................120
Ovw Tx Qlty ...................................159 Port ...................................................120
Rx Quality .....................................159 PVID ..................................................120
Tx Quality ......................................159 Unicast MAC Learning Limit ...................119
T2 RADIO ...........................................158
Untagged Ports ...................................121
TE LAN-1 ............................................158
VLAN ID .............................................121
TE LAN-2 ............................................158
WTR Time ..........................................157

System Date/Time ..................................... 37

System Up Time ........................................ 37


W
Wake Up
NE Location ......................................... 59
NMS IP Address .................................... 59
T Status ................................................. 59

Tx Freq ...................................................170 Timeout (Minutes) ................................ 59

Tx Transmitter ................................. 170, 182 WEB LCT


Product Code ....................................... 37
Release ................................................. 9
Version ............................................... 37

U WEB LCT Console ...................................... 14

Upper Profile ............................................ 94

Users
Group ................................................. 84
Groups
CLI ................................................ 80
FTP ................................................ 80
HTTP ............................................. 80
Name ............................................. 80
Profile ....................................... 80, 84
SNMP ............................................. 80
Timeout .............................................. 84
User ................................................... 84

V
VLAN
Acceptable Frame Types .......................120
Default User Priority ............................120
Ether Type .........................................121
Global MAC Learning Status ..................119
Ingress Filtering ..................................120
Learning Mode ....................................119
MAC Add. Table Aging Time ..................119
Max Supported VLAN ...........................119

220 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002


ASSISTANCE SERVICE

For more information, refer to the section relevant to the technical support on the Internet site of the com-
pany manufacturing the product.

WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002 221


222 WEB LCT ALFOplus80HD - Release 1.2 - MN.00313.E - 002